Hobart Quantum Manual

SUPERVISOR MANUAL

S E R V I C E S C A L ES E R V I C E S C A L E

SUPERVISOR MANUAL

Quantum ® Scale System

Supervisor Manual

Models

Quantum ScaleStandard ML-29032Narrow ML-29035Prepack ML-29037Linerless ML-29039TCP/IP ML-29191

Quantum PrinterStandard ML-29044Narrow ML-29048

Quantum Self ServiceStandard ML-29041Narrow ML-29042

Quantum Hanging Scale ML-29188

701 S. RIDGE AVENUETROY, OHIO 45374

937-332-3000www.hobartcorp.com

F–34350 (12-99)

Quantum Scale

Quantum Self Service Scale

Quantum Hanging Scale

Quantum Scale System

i Copyright Hobart Corporation 1997

Table of Contents

Chapter One: Introduction to This Manual .................................................................... 1-1FCC Note................................................................................................................ 1-2Verify Correctness of Weight & Price....................................................................... 1-2Supervisor Manual Overview................................................................................... 1-3How to Use This Manual ......................................................................................... 1-4

Chapter Two: General Information About the Quantum ............................................... 2-1General Information ................................................................................................ 2-2Electrical Connections............................................................................................. 2-2Communication Connections................................................................................... 2-3Reset Button ........................................................................................................... 2-3Control Panel Overview........................................................................................... 2-4Screen Highlights.................................................................................................... 2-6Label Stock............................................................................................................. 2-8Keyboard (Optional Feature) ................................................................................... 2-9HELP Key Functions ............................................................................................... 2-10

Help on “F” Keys.............................................................................................. 2-11About the Keyboard ......................................................................................... 2-11Basic Help ....................................................................................................... 2-12Moving Through the System ............................................................................ 2-13

Supervisor Mode Overview ..................................................................................... 2-14Accessing the Supervisor Menu ....................................................................... 2-14

Chapter Three: Change Product ................................................................................... 3-1Change Product Flowchart ...................................................................................... 3-2Overview................................................................................................................. 3-3Hobart Recommended Class Structure.................................................................... 3-4Accessing the Change Product Function ................................................................ 3-5Common “F” Keys for Change Product Functions .................................................... 3-7

Delete This Product ......................................................................................... 3-8Change Another Field ...................................................................................... 3-9

Creating a New Class.............................................................................................. 3-10Editing a Class........................................................................................................ 3-13Adding a New Product............................................................................................. 3-14Support File Overview............................................................................................. 3-19

Special Messages............................................................................................ 3-22Expanded Text ................................................................................................ 3-31NutriFacts Data................................................................................................ 3-42Marquee Messages ......................................................................................... 3-50

Time Stamp Changes.............................................................................................. 3-62Making Changes to Product Information .................................................................. 3-65


ii

Assessing the Change Product Menu Screen...........................................................3-66Changing the Unit Price ....................................................................................3-68Changing Tare..................................................................................................3-69Changing Shelf Life / Product Life .....................................................................3-73Changing a Product’s Reporting Class..............................................................3-74Changing All Price Fields..................................................................................3-76Changing All Fields...........................................................................................3-81Making Batch Price Changes............................................................................3-81Setting up a Forced Price PLU..........................................................................3-86

Chapter Four: Totals Menu .............................................................................................4-1Totals Menu Flowchart.............................................................................................4-2Totals Menu Overview .............................................................................................4-3View Totals..............................................................................................................4-7

View Product Totals..........................................................................................4-8View Operator Totals ........................................................................................4-11View Hourly Totals............................................................................................4-14

Clear Totals .............................................................................................................4-17Clear All Product Totals ....................................................................................4-19Clear One Product’s Totals ...............................................................................4-20Clear One Totals Type for All Products .............................................................4-22Clear All Operator Totals ..................................................................................4-24Clear All Hourly Totals ......................................................................................4-25Clear All Totals .................................................................................................4-27

Void Totals ..............................................................................................................4-28Void Product Totals ..........................................................................................4-29Void Operator Totals.........................................................................................4-31Void Hourly Totals ............................................................................................4-32

Configure Totals Type..............................................................................................4-34Create a Type...................................................................................................4-35Edit Totals Type................................................................................................4-37Delete Totals Type ...........................................................................................4-39

Collect Totals via MiniNet II ......................................................................................4-40

Chapter Five: Print Reports Menu ..................................................................................5-1Print Reports Flowchart............................................................................................5-2Print Reports Menu Overview...................................................................................5-3Print Reports Menu..................................................................................................5-5

Print Product Totals Menu.................................................................................5-6Print All Operator Totals....................................................................................5-8Print Hourly Totals ............................................................................................5-9Print All Totals Reports .....................................................................................5-11Print a Cutting Test Report................................................................................5-13

Print Products Menu ................................................................................................5-18Print Product List Menu.....................................................................................5-19Print Product Review Menu...............................................................................5-21Print Time Stamp Changes ..............................................................................5-23

Print Flashkeys ........................................................................................................5-25Print Operator ID List ...............................................................................................5-26


iii

Print Label Related Items Menu............................................................................... 5-28Print Reusable Text Menu................................................................................ 5-29Print Label Types............................................................................................. 5-38Print Graphics.................................................................................................. 5-40

Print Configuration .................................................................................................. 5-43Print Miscellaneous Menu ....................................................................................... 5-45

Chapter Six: Backup/Restore ........................................................................................ 6-1Backup/Restore Flowchart ...................................................................................... 6-2Overview................................................................................................................. 6-3Backup to Diskette .................................................................................................. 6-6

Unmark Changed Items ................................................................................... 6-10Backup Changes to Diskette ................................................................................... 6-11Restore from Diskette.............................................................................................. 6-15

Bad Record Scan............................................................................................. 6-18Add Changes from Diskette..................................................................................... 6-19Backup or Restore with IntraNet .............................................................................. 6-23

Send to Scales via IntraNet.............................................................................. 6-23Send Changes via IntraNet .............................................................................. 6-25

Chapter Seven: Scale Setup .......................................................................................... 7-1Scale Setup Flowchart ............................................................................................ 7-2Overview................................................................................................................. 7-3Creating Operator ID’s ............................................................................................ 7-3

Operator Log-on Required ............................................................................... 7-5Flashkeys ............................................................................................................... 7-6

Positioning the Flashkeys ................................................................................ 7-8Changing Flashkey Height/Width ..................................................................... 7-8Creating Flashkeys .......................................................................................... 7-10Creating a Product-Group Flashkey ................................................................. 7-15View Flashkey Group....................................................................................... 7-16Edit Home Flashkey Group .............................................................................. 7-17Delete Flashkey............................................................................................... 7-18Go To Flashkey Group..................................................................................... 7-19Delete a Flashkey Group ................................................................................. 7-20Clear a Flashkey Group ................................................................................... 7-22Insert a Flashkey Group................................................................................... 7-23Move a Flashkey Group ................................................................................... 7-25Copy a Flashkey Group ................................................................................... 7-27

Working with Labels ................................................................................................ 7-30Label Stock Styles ........................................................................................... 7-31

Die Cut Labels.......................................................................................... 7-31Continuous Label Stock ............................................................................ 7-31Linerless................................................................................................... 7-31

Using the Labels Menu............................................................................................ 7-32Select Special Fields to Print on a Label........................................................... 7-33Label Text Names............................................................................................ 7-34Reviewing Available Fields............................................................................... 7-36


iv

Label Information..............................................................................................7-37Changing the Default Label Types .............................................................7-37Using Word Wrap ......................................................................................7-39

Label Types......................................................................................................7-40Selecting Label Types ......................................................................................7-41Standard Labels by Family................................................................................7-43Standard Labels by Size ...................................................................................7-64Narrow Labels ..................................................................................................7-81Custom Labels .................................................................................................7-83Graphics...........................................................................................................7-84Itemized Labels ................................................................................................7-86

Selecting Item Tickets ...............................................................................7-88Selecting Itemized Receipts.......................................................................7-90

Scale Operation .......................................................................................................7-91Set What the Operator Can Modify ...................................................................7-92Date/Time.........................................................................................................7-94Setup Normal Scale Operation..........................................................................7-95

Scale ID & Store Information....................................................................................7-100Communications ......................................................................................................7-102

Cassette/Disk ...................................................................................................7-103Network............................................................................................................7-105

Marquee Setup ........................................................................................................7-107Marquee Modes................................................................................................7-118Creating a Permanent or Daily Message ...........................................................7-110Timed Marquee Messages................................................................................7-113

Chapter Eight: Miscellaneous Menu ..............................................................................8-1Miscellaneous Menu Flowchart ................................................................................8-2Overview .................................................................................................................8-3Delete Time Stamp Changes ...................................................................................8-3Information Tracker..................................................................................................8-5

Network Report ................................................................................................8-6Operator Changes ............................................................................................8-8

Return to Operate Mode ..........................................................................................8-9

Chapter Nine: Self Service ..............................................................................................9-1Overview .................................................................................................................9-2Using the Keyboard and Keypad..............................................................................9-3Configuring Self Service...........................................................................................9-3

Setting the Date & Time....................................................................................9-4Setting the Default Label Types ........................................................................9-5Setting Up Security/Operator IDs ......................................................................9-6Setting Up Auto Lookup ....................................................................................9-8Setting Up Self Service .....................................................................................9-10Setting Up the Consumer Default Screen..........................................................9-12Zeroing the Scale .............................................................................................9-15

Using the Self Service Produce Keypad ...................................................................9-16Setting Up Speedkeys ......................................................................................9-16Deleting Speedkeys..........................................................................................9-19


v

Chapter Ten: Interfacing the SLA with the Quantum .................................................... 10-1Overview................................................................................................................. 10-2Programming a Security Label to be Issued for a Specific PLU................................ 10-2

Programming a New PLU................................................................................. 10-3Programming an Existing PLU ......................................................................... 10-5

Programming a Minimum Price Per Pound, Total Price, or Both............................... 10-6

Chapter Eleven: Working With Merchandising Programs ............................................ 11-1Overview................................................................................................................. 11-2Setting Up Your Scale for Merchandising Programs................................................. 11-2Using Advertised Price ............................................................................................ 11-3

Advertised Sale Pricing .................................................................................... 11-4Value Packing.................................................................................................. 11-4Retail Comparison ........................................................................................... 11-5Activating Advertised Price............................................................................... 11-6Reactivating Regular Price............................................................................... 11-8

Using the Frequent Shopper Program ..................................................................... 11-10Frequent Shopper Configuration Questions...................................................... 11-11Configuring Frequent Shopper ......................................................................... 11-12Activating Frequent Shopper ............................................................................ 11-13Reactivating Regular Price............................................................................... 11-15

Using Bonus Points................................................................................................. 11-16Setting Up Bonus Points .................................................................................. 11-17

Using Portion Pricing............................................................................................... 11-17Activating Portion Pricing ................................................................................. 11-18Setting Up Portion Pricing ................................................................................ 11-20

Using Percent Added .............................................................................................. 11-21Activating the Percent Added ........................................................................... 11-21Reactivating the Regular Price ......................................................................... 11-23

Chapter Twelve: Configuring an EAN13 Barcode ......................................................... 12-1Overview................................................................................................................. 12-2Setting Up Your Scale for EAN13 Barcode .............................................................. 12-3Setting Up the EAN13 Default Prefix ....................................................................... 12-3Entering a New Product Using EAN13 Format......................................................... 12-5Changing an Existing PLU to an EAN13 Format ...................................................... 12-9

Chapter Thirteen: Understanding Hardwired TCP/IPScale Communication ..................................................................................................... 13-1

Overview................................................................................................................. 13-2Understanding the IP Addresses ............................................................................. 13-2

Setting Up IP Addresses on an Isolated Network.............................................. 13-3Setting Up IP Addresses on an Existing Network.............................................. 13-3

IntraNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form ........................................................... 13-4Setting Up TCP/IP Networks ................................................................................... 13-5

Sample Ethernet Wiring Illustration .................................................................. 13-6Setting Up ScaleMaster Configuration.............................................................. 13-7Example: ScaleMaster .................................................................................... 13-9Setting Up ScaleMaster Located on a Different Network................................... 13-10


vi

Setting Up IntraNet Configuration......................................................................13-13Example: IntraNet............................................................................................13-19Setting Up ScaleMaster/IntraNet Configuration .................................................13-20Example: ScaleMaster/IntraNet........................................................................13-20

Testing the Scales TCP/IP Connection.....................................................................13-22Ping Test ..........................................................................................................13-22L.E.D. ...............................................................................................................13-25

Chapter Fourteen: Understanding Wireless TCP/IPScale Communication ......................................................................................................14-1

Overview .................................................................................................................14-2Understanding Frequencies .....................................................................................14-2

What is Frequency Hopping?............................................................................14-3What is Direct Sequence?.................................................................................14-4

Frequency Protocols ................................................................................................14-4Setting Up Wireless Communication ........................................................................14-5

What is an Access Point? .................................................................................14-5What is a PC Network Card and Adapter Board? ..............................................14-6Using an Antenna .............................................................................................14-6

Configuring Wireless TCP/IP Networks ....................................................................14-7Configuring the Network Card ..................................................................................14-7Signal Strength Meter Test.......................................................................................14-13

Appendix ..........................................................................................................................A-1Understanding Network Configurations ....................................................................A-2

What Does Client & Server Really Mean? .........................................................A-2ScaleMaster .....................................................................................................A-3IntraNet ............................................................................................................A-3ScaleMaster/IntraNet ........................................................................................A-5

Sending Data to the Scales.........................................................................A-5Reading Data from the Scales.....................................................................A-5

MiniNet II ..........................................................................................................A-6Understanding Ethernet Networks............................................................................A-6

Hubs ................................................................................................................A-6Wiring...............................................................................................................A-6Crossover Function...........................................................................................A-7

TCP/IP Troubleshooting Addresses..........................................................................A-11Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration ..............................................................A-16

EAN13 Barcode Examples................................................................................A-17Understanding the Text Editor..................................................................................A-20

Select Font .......................................................................................................A-21Mark Text .........................................................................................................A-22Cut Text ...........................................................................................................A-23Paste Text ........................................................................................................A-24Copy Text.........................................................................................................A-25

Marquee Editor ........................................................................................................A-27


vii

Creating Macros (Using the Save/Recall Key) ......................................................... A-28Recording a Macro........................................................................................... A-28Executing a Macro ........................................................................................... A-29Deleting a Macro.............................................................................................. A-30

Proportional Tare (Percentage Tare) ....................................................................... A-30Percentage Tare Procedure ............................................................................. A-31How the Percentage Tare is Calculated............................................................ A-31

Hobart Recommended Class Structure.................................................................... A-33Quantum Function Codes........................................................................................ A-37

Glossary of Common Terms

Index


1 - 1 Introduction to This Manual

Chapter One: Introduction to This Manual

♦ FCC Note♦ Verify Correctness of Weight & Price♦ Supervisor Manual Overview♦ How to Use This Manual


Introduction to This Manual 1 - 2


SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

FCC Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply withthe limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful interference when theequipment is operated in a commercial environment. Thisequipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequencyenergy and, if not installed and used in accordance with theinstruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. Operation of this equipment in aresidential area is likely to cause harmful interference; inwhich case, the user will be required to correct theinterference at his own expense.

Verify Correctness ofWeight & Price

Verification of information on labels should be maderoutinely. Check the multiplication of price-per-poundtimes weight, and check the indicated weight againstprinted weight. Weigh the same package several times toverify consistency. Bear in mind that some packages whichweigh near the middle of the .01 lb. increment will normallyvary up or down by .01 lb. Greater variation than .01 lb.indicates a need for adjustment of the system. In such cases,or whenever necessary, contact your authorized Hobartservice representative.



Supervisor ManualOverview

This manual will use the following methods to explainkeystrokes and data entry procedures:

♦ The word PRESS means to press a key on the ControlPanel.

♦ The word TYPE means to press a series of keys on the

Control Panel and press [ENTER]. ♦ The word SELECT means to choose an item from the

display, using the “F” Keys, “S” Keys or Flashkeys. ♦ The word ENTER means to press the [ENTER] key on

the Control Panel. ♦ Words in uppercase enclosed in brackets (for example

[ENTER]) represent specific keys.

The following special instructions are used in the manual:

☛ Note

A note is information that you need to know, but it is not anactual step in the procedures.

✎ Tip

A tip is additional information that may be useful when youare using the scale system.

Look At This

Look At This is information to alert you that you may bedoing something that will permanently alter your scalesystem.


Introduction to This Manual 1 - 4

How to Use ThisManual

Refer to the following sections for information about usingthe Quantum Scale System.

♦ Chapter Two: General Information provides you basicinformation about the Quantum’s features including:

* Standard Features * Communications Connections * Reset Button * Control Panel Overview * Screen Highlights * HELP Key Functions♦ Chapter Three: Change Product provides you information

on how to create or edit a class, add a new product, ormake changes to product information already in thedatabase. It also provides an overview to classstructures and common “F” Keys for the ChangeProduct function.

♦ Chapter Four: Totals Menu provides you the necessaryinformation so that you can view, clear, or void totals,configure totals types, and collect totals via MiniNet II.

♦ Chapter Five: Print Reports Menu gives detailedinformation on how to print product, operator andhourly totals, flashkeys, an operator ID list, and labelrelated items. You can also print the scale’sconfiguration from this menu.

♦ Chapter Six: Backup/Restore provides the procedures forbacking up or restoring the scale’s database to/from adiskette or cassette, as well as through MiniNet II.

♦ Chapter Seven: Scale Setup provides you information oncreating and/or editing Operator ID’s and Flashkeys,specifying label information (i.e., text names, label types,graphics, etc.), designating scale operation, setting upthe scale ID and store information, determining thecommunications setup for the scale, and setting upmarquee messages to display.

♦ Chapter Eight: Miscellaneous Menu provides youinformation on how to delete time stamp changes, andtrack information such as network information andoperator changes. It also explains how to return to theOperate Mode from the Supervisor Menu.

♦ Chapter Nine: Self Service provides you with informationabout on the Self Service Scale and provides procedureson setting up the scale for self service operation.

♦ Chapter Ten: Interfacing with the Security Label Applier orSecurity Label Dispenser explains how to set up the scaleto use a security label applier or security label dispenser.



How to Use This ManualContinued...

♦ Chapter Eleven: Working With Merchandising Programsprovides information and procedures for usingAdvertised Price, Frequent Shopper, Percent Added,Portion Pricing, and Bonus Points Programs.

♦ Chapter Twelve: Configuring an EAN13 Barcode explainshow to configure an EAN13 Barcode.

♦ Chapter Thirteen: Understanding TCP/IP Communicationprovides information and procedures for setting upTCP/IP Networks and testing a scales TCP/IPconnection.

♦ Chapter Fourteen: Understanding Wireless Communicationprovides information about Frequencies and WirelessCommunication and explains how to setup wirelessnetworks for several providers.

♦ The Appendix provides information on the followingtopics:* Understanding Network Configurations* Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration

* Text and Marquee Editors * Creating Macros * Label Types and Graphics * Recommended Class Structure * Function Codes♦ The Glossary provides a definition of some common

terms used throughout the manual.♦ The Index provides you a listing of the topics in this

manual and their corresponding page numbers.


2 - 1 General Information

Chapter Two: General Information Aboutthe Quantum

♦ General Information♦ Electrical Connections♦ Communication Connections♦ Reset Button♦ Control Panel Overview♦ Screen Highlights♦ Label Stock♦ Keyboard (Optional)♦ HELP Key Functions

• Help on “F” keys• About the Keyboard• Basic Help• Moving Through the System

♦ Supervisor Mode Overview• Accessing the Supervisor Menu


General Information 2 - 2

General Information The Quantum Scale System is perfect for your over-the-counter weighing applications. This state-of-the-artweighing system can handle a broad variety of products fordeli, bakery, produce, fish and cheese departments. It canalso function in a Prepack Scale mode when necessary.

With 512K memory, the system can store information onthousands of products; including NutriFacts which allowsyou to meet labeling law requirements and Expanded Textfor Recipes and Cooking Instructions.

A new feature with the Quantum is Flashkeys which alloweasy access to product information. A maximum of 16Flashkeys can be displayed on a screen at one time.Multiple screens can be programmed to mirror yourproduct case. When an item is called up from memory, theproduct information can be reviewed or changed beforeweighing or label printing. This allows quicker and easierservice to your customers.

Another new feature is the On Screen Library whichprovides you with the ability to locate the PLU informationusing the Class Structure. A detailed description of thisfeature is found later in this manual.

The Quantum Scale System should be installed or movedonly by qualified Hobart-trained service technicians. It canoperate in a temperature range from 32oF to 104oF(0oC to 40o C).

Electrical Connections The Power Cord receptacle is located on the bottom side ofthe Quantum base. The power cord is connected to 120V.,60 Hz., Single (1) Phase electrical power. Once the Quantumis plugged in, the system is ready to begin the Power-upSequence.



CommunicationConnections

In addition to the Power Cord, there are up to four (4)additional ports.

On the left side of the scale, there are several ports forperipherals such as:♦ Disk Player/Recorder & Cassette Player/Recorder

(RS232)♦ IBM PC Keyboard (Keyboard)♦ Floppy Disk Drive or Secondary Printer (MODNET)♦ Future Expansion (i.e., parallel port for Report Printer)

Reset Button Also located on the left side of the scale is the Reset Button.In the unlikely event the scale stops responding to keyboardinput, you will use the Reset Button to reset the scale back tothe Start a Run Screen.

To reset the scale, you must:

• Hold in the Reset Button (small black button) for 2 - 3seconds. (See Photo above for Reset Button location.)

☛ Note

The POWER key on the front of the Control Panel turns thedisplays (both operator and customer) ON and OFF. It isonly functional from the Start a Run Screen. This key shouldbe used at the end of the day to conserve power.



Control PanelOverview

Key/Highlight Function

POWER Turns the screen and the keyboard ON/OFF.

“F” Keys (F1-F8) Allows you to make selections from the menu screens or select a row ofFlashkeys.

Numeric Keypad Allows you to enter numeric data.

BACKSPACE Allows you to remove the highlighted character or the character to the left of thecursor.

CLEAR Allows you to reset a numeric field to zero. This key is not active in a text field.

ESC (Escape) Allows you to return to the previous screen. Pressing [ESC] will save anychanges you make on a screen.

PRINT Allows you to print a label or report.

ENTER Allows the scale to accept the selected data and move to the next field. It alsomay advance the cursor to the next screen.

PREV (Previous) Moves you back one screen.

NEXT Moves you to the next screen.

ARROW KEYS Allows you to move the cursor from field-to-field (UP and DOWN Arrow Keys)or from character-to-character (LEFT and RIGHT Arrow Keys) in a field.



Key/Highlight Function

Alpha Characters Allows you to enter upper case or lower case alpha characters while in a textfield.

SPECIAL CHARS. Press this key to type a special character (found in the upper left corner of eachalpha-key). You must press Special Chars. for each Special Character.

CHANGE CASE Allows you to switch between Upper or Lower Case. You must press ChangeCase each time you want to change the case in a text field.

RETURN Advances the cursor to the next field or inserts an End-of-Line in a text field.

SPACE Allows you to type (add) a space between words or characters.

“S” Keys (S1-S4) Allows you to select the column when selecting a Flashkey.

SAVE/RECALL Press this key to have the scale remember a series of keystrokes which can berecalled later by pressing a Flashkey or by entering a reference number (MacroID).

SUPER MENU ON/OFF Allows you to access the Supervisor Menu from the Start a Run Screen or fromany other screen in the Supervisor Mode.

REZERO Allows you to set the scale to 0.00 pounds from the Start a Run or Run Screen.

HELP Allows you to access the Help Screens. From the Run Screen in the OperateMode, it allows you to access the On Screen Library and select a PLU.

CONTRAST Allows you to adjust the lightness and darkness of the screen image based on theviewing angle.

Cursor Highlights text or the position where you will enter data.



Screen Highlights The Quantum Scale System has several common screencharacteristics that assists you in interacting with the scale.We refer to these as “Screen Highlights.” The highlights actthe same regardless of your screen location.

Highlight Description

Active Field A box surrounding text or numericfields indicates that this field is theactive field. If you begin typing fromthe keyboard or control panel, thedata will be entered into this field.

Bar Cursor A bar cursor (❚) indicates that thefield is a text field.

Block Cursor A block cursor (■) indicates that thefield is a numeric field.

Changeable Fields If a field has a dotted line (.............)under it, this means that the field isable to be changed or edited.

Grayed Fields If a field or selection is grayed, itmeans that it is not available for thatparticular screen or transaction.



Highlight DescriptionScreen Highlights

Prompt Line The Prompt Line is white text,reversed out of a black box. It istypically located at the bottomportion of the screen. It prompts youon what your next step should be.Depending on your scale’sconfiguration, it may be black textreversed out of a white box.

Screen Title The Screen Title identifies the screenname and function that you areattempting to complete.

Highlight DescriptionControl Panel

ESC (Escape) This key on the Control Panel is usedto move you back a level (i.e., onescreen).

“F” Keys These keys are located to the right ofthe display screen and are used tomake menu selections.

Left/Right ArrowKeys

Pressing either of these keys movesyou within an active field allowingyou to move the cursor back onecharacter at a time.

“S” Keys These keys are located below thedisplay screen and are used to makeselections of operators, products andmacros.



Label Stock The following list details important information about labelsand label printing.♦ The Quantum thermal printhead requires no ink or

ribbon.♦ Thermal labels used for transactions may be preprinted

or blank.♦ Preprinted labels may be printed with a customer logo

and/or other merchandising information.♦ When using blank labels, the Quantum can be set up to

print all of the necessary information.

Labels are available in the following sizes:♦ 1.5” x 1.0” ♦ 2.25” x 2.375”♦ 1.5” x 1.5” ♦ 2.25” x 3.0”♦ 1.5” x 2.0” ♦ 2.25” x 4.5”♦ 1.5” x 3.0” ♦ 2.25” x 6.0”♦ 2.25” x 1.75” ♦ 2.25” x 8.0”

☛ Note

A complete explanation of the Label Types can be found inthe Appendix of this Manual.

✎ Tip

Hobart supplied labels are recommended to minimizeservice problems and extend the life of the printhead.



Keyboard (Optional) The Quantum Scale System is equipped with a serial portthat allows you to use an optional keyboard for computer-like editing of your product files.

♦ There are three (3) styles of keyboards. One of thesestyles will be supplied.

Maxi Switch Keyboard Cherry Keyboard Key Tronic Keyboard

This is the drawing of a typical computer keyboard. Keep inmind that not all keyboard layouts are the same.



The Keyboard Plug-In is located on the left side of the unit.

HELP Key Functions The Quantum is equipped with context sensitive HelpScreens to assist you in quick, efficient scale operation. TheHELP Function has four (4) levels of assistance.

♦ Help of “F” Keys♦ About the Keyboard♦ Basic Help♦ Moving Through the System

☛ Note

In addition to assisting you with scale operation, you willalso press HELP to access the On Screen Library. Refer tothe “On Screen Library” section later in this manual for acomplete explanation of this function.



(F1) Help on “F” Keys By pressing [F1] on the Help Screen, you get an explanationof the functions you can perform when you select thevarious “F” Keys available for the current function (i.e., thefunction for which you pressed HELP).

Example: From the Start a Run Screen:

1. PRESS [HELP].2. PRESS [F1] to select Help on “F” Keys. You get an

explanation of Date/Time, the only “F” Key available onthat screen.

(F2) About the Keyboard By pressing [F2] to select “About the Keyboard,” you get adetailed explanation of the following keys:

♦ ENTER♦ ESCAPE♦ ARROW KEYS♦ BACKSPACE♦ CLEAR♦ POWER♦ PRINT

♦ NEXT♦ PREV (Previous)♦ REZERO♦ SAVE/RECALL♦ FLASHKEYS♦ SUPER MENU ON/OFF



(F3) Basic Help When you press [HELP], the default automatically sendsyou to the Basic Help Screen(s) for the selected function orfield. As you might suspect, Basic Help gives you a briefdescription of the function or selected field, including notesto help you process the transaction better. From any otherHELP selection, PRESS [F3] to access Basic Help.



(F4) Moving Through theSystem

Moving Through the System is found by pressing [F4] whilein the HELP mode. When you select [F4], you get anexplanation of how to:

♦ Return to the Previous Screen♦ Execute a Forced Operator Log-on♦ Access the Supervisor Menu



Supervisor ModeOverview

From the Supervisor Mode, you can complete the followingmajor functions:♦ Change or Create Product Information (Change Product)♦ View and Modify Totals Information (Totals Menu)♦ Print Reports on all scale data (Print Reports Menu)♦ Backup or Restore scale data (Backup /Restore Menu)♦ Setup the configuration of the scale (Scale Setup)♦ Return to the Operate Mode

Accessing the SupervisorMenu

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [SUPER MENU

ON/OFF]2. TYPE Secret ID Number

and PRESS [ENTER] (Ifrequired)

From the Start a run Screen:

1. PRESS [SUPER MENU ON/OFF] on the Control Panel.2. Type your Secret ID Number (if required) and PRESS

[ENTER]. You should now be on the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note

The Enter Secret ID prompt will only appear if security hasbeen enabled in your system. Refer to the Scale Setupsection later in this manual for a complete explanation ofthis function.

✎ Tip

You may also use the Function Codes listed in the Appendixof this manual to access a particular Supervisor Functionwithout having to use the menus.

✎ Tip

While in the Supervisor Mode, pressing the SUPER MENUON/OFF Key sends you back to the Supervisor Menu. If youpress it again, it returns you to the screen you werepreviously on.


3 - 1 Change Product

Chapter Three: Change Product

♦ Overview♦ Hobart Recommended Class Structure♦ Accessing the Change Product Function♦ Common “F” Keys for Change Product Functions

• Delete This Product• Change Another Field

♦ Creating a New Class♦ Editing a Class♦ Adding a New Product

• Support File Overview• Special Messages• Expanded Text• NutriFacts Data• Marquee Messages

♦ Time Stamp Changes♦ Making Changes to Product Information

• Accessing the Change Product Menu Screen• Changing the Unit Price• Changing Tare• Changing Shelf Life/Product Life• Changing a Product’s Reporting Class• Changing All Price Fields• Changing All Fields• Making Batch Price Changes

♦ Setting Up a Forced Price PLU


Change Product 3 - 2

Change Product Flowchart

CHANGEPRODUCT

PRESS [F1]ChangeProduct

ImmediateChanges

(F1)

Time StampChanges

(F2)

PRESS [F1]ChangeProduct

ChangeAnother Product

(F1)

Delete This Product

(F3)

ChangeAnother

Field (F5)

Unit Price (F1)

Tare (F2)

Shelf Life (F3)

Class (F4)

All Price Fields

(F6)

All Fields (F7)

ChangeAnother Product

(F1)

Delete This Product

(F3)

ChangeAnother

Field (F5)

Change Text Field (F6)

ChangePricing Mode

(F7)

Next Page (F8)

Page 2 of 3

Graphics

Primary Printer

Label Type

SecondaryPrinter

Label Type

Page 3 of 3

Special Message

Expanded Text

NutriFacts

Marquee Messages

Batch Price Changes

(F8)

ChangePricing Mode

(F7)



Change ProductSupervisor Menu“F” Key = F1

The Change Product option allows you to:

♦ Set-Up a Class Structure♦ Add a New Class or Edit Class Information

Add a New Product♦ Change Product Information fields such as:

• Unit Price• Tare• Shelf Life/Product Life• Class

♦ Change All Price related fields for a Product (See Note)♦ Change All Fields (See Note)

• Includes fields already discussed• Label Information (Graphics & Label Types)• Support Files (Expanded Text, Special Messages,

NutriFacts and Marquee Messages)♦ Communicate product information changes

immediately or at a specified time (Time StampChanges)

♦ Change the Price of a Class or Range of PLU’s

☛ Note

The fields that can be changed during this function will varydepending on the PLU type (i.e., Random Weight, FixedWeight, By Count or Fluid Ounce).

The remainder of this chapter discusses each one of thesefunctions in greater detail. However, before we actuallywork with the Change Product function, there are some keyconcepts that must be understood.



Hobart RecommendedClass Structure

☛ Note

The paragraphs that follow are an excerpt from the HobartPLU Scales Product Look-Up Data Standards Workbook, F-2066(R3-91). The Appendix contains several examples of how toset up your Class Structure. For the complete workbook,request Form 2066 (R3-91) from your local Hobart office.

Whenever an item is weighed on a Hobart PLU Scale, thetotal’s information (i.e., the number of packages, poundsand dollars weighed) are stored in the Scale’s memory.These totals are stored by individual items, but they can alsobe stored by groups of items, called Classes.

For example, in the meat department, the item file can beeasily grouped into major commodities such as BEEF,PORK, VEAL, etc. The major commodities can then begrouped into their primal cuts such as CHUCK, RIB, LOIN,GROUND, etc. This allows you to monitor major groups ofitems (classes), instead of having to monitor each individualitem.

There is a chart in the Appendix that shows the HobartRecommended Class Structure, including a detailedstructure for the Meat Department. The class descriptionshave been established in accordance with the UPC CouncilStandards, and the Class Numbers have been assignedusing PLU’s 009000-009989. (These numbers were chosenbecause not many retailers are using these upper levelnumbers as PLU’s in their own files.) The numbers anddescriptions can be changed as needed in order to customizethe file for each individual retailer, but this class systemshould be used in the absence of a preferred alternative.Other random weight departments should be structuredaccording to the needs of the department’s merchandisers.

With a Class Structure in place, it then becomes easy to set-up your products so that you can track totals for each Classand SubClass.



Accessing the ChangeProduct Function

QUICK STEPS

From the Start a Run Screen:1. PRESS [SUPER MENU

ON/OFF]2. TYPE ID Number3. PRESS [ENTER]4. PRESS [F1]

To access the Change Product function from the Start a RunScreen:

1. PRESS [SUPER MENU ON/OFF].2. TYPE your Operator ID (if required) and PRESS

[ENTER].3. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change

Product.

☛ Note

If you have previously configured your scale with IntraNetturned ON, the Change Product Menu Screen will appear.Follow the directions for setting up the scale to makeImmediate or Time Stamp Changes. (An explanation ofhow to set Time Stamp Changes is found later in thischapter.)



For the remainder of this chapter, let’s assume that IntraNetis turned ON and that all changes will take placeimmediately.

By pressing F1, Immediate Changes, you are confirming thatyou want the product information changes to be saved asyou make them.

1. PRESS [F1] to confirm Immediate Changes. You shouldnow be on the Change Product: Unit Price Screen.

Before we get to the specifics of using the Change Productfunction, let’s take a look at some commonly used functionsthat are consistent for all of the change functions.



Common “F” Keys forChange ProductFunctions

While in the Change Product function, you have the abilityto quickly accomplish a task for one PLU and move to thenext without exiting back to the Change Product MenuScreen. Most Change Product screens have five (5) “F”keys:

♦ F1 - Change Another Product: This selection allows youto quickly move to another PLU so that you can makeadditional product changes.

♦ F2 – Do Not Apply Security Label: This selection allowsyou to issue a security label when interfacing with aSecurity Label Applier or Security Label Dispenser. (Seefurther explanation in Chapter 10).

♦ F3 - Delete This Product: This selection deletes theproduct from the scale’s memory. (See explanation onthe following page.)

♦ F5 - Change Another Field: This selection returns you tothe Change Product Selection Menu and allows you toselect another field to change. (See explanation on thefollowing pages.)

♦ F6 - Change Text Field: This selection allows you tochange the text field. It is not available on all functionsand is only enabled when the active field is a text field(i.e., Description).

♦ F7 - Change Pricing Mode: This selection is only enabledif you are on a price field and you have configured thescale for Lbs. for Pricing or Fractional Pricing.



(F3) Delete This Product

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F1]2. PRESS [F1] or [F2]3. TYPE Product Number4. Verify Description5. PRESS [F3]6. Repeat Steps 3-5 or PRESS

[ESC]

To delete a product:

1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1].2. PRESS [F1] to select Immediate Changes --OR-- PRESS

[F2] to select Time Stamp Changes.3. TYPE the Product Number you want to delete.4. Verify the Description of the product you want to delete.5. PRESS [F3] to delete the Product Number and

permanently remove the PLU from memory.

6. Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to delete additional PLU’s or PRESS[ESC] to save the changes and return to the SupervisorMenu or the Change Product Menu if IntraNet isconfigured.



(F5) Change Another Field The Change Another Field softkey is available on anyChange Product screen except Batch Price Changes. Whenyou press this key, you are sent to the Change ProductSelection Menu Screen. From this menu, you can select thefollowing:♦ F1 - Unit Price♦ F2 - Tare♦ F3 - Shelf Life♦ F4 - Class♦ F6 - All Price Fields♦ F7 - All Fields♦ F8 - Batch Price Changes

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]

To Change Another Field:

1. From the Change Product: Unit Price Screen (or any otherChange Product Screen except Batch Price Changes),PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field. You are nowon the Change Product Selection Menu Screen.

2. You may now select any of the softkeys to begin makingyour product changes.

☛ Note

A complete explanation of how to execute the changeproduct functions from this screen are found later in thischapter.



Creating a New Class As already discussed, your PLU information can beorganized into Classes. To simplify the data trackingprocess, you can create the Class Structure before you startadding product information into your data file. Thefollowing explanation details how to create a new class.

QUICK STEPS

From the Change Product UnitPrice Screen:1. TYPE the Class Number2. PRESS [F2]3. PRESS [F6]4. TYPE Description5. PRESS [ESC]6. TYPE the Reporting Class7. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

To add a new Class:

1. On the Change Product: Unit Price Screen, TYPE the NewClass Number in the Product Number field. (See Note)

2. PRESS [F2] to select Add a New Class. You will now beon the Change Class Screen.

☛ Note

In order to add a new class or product, the number youenter in this field must be unique. If the number alreadyexists as a PLU you will remain on the current ChangeProduct screen. If the number you enter is new, you will beasked if you want to add the new number as a Product or aClass. (The screen will be similar to the one above.) If youselect New Product, you will be sent to the Change ProductScreen. If you select New Class, you will be sent to theChange Class Screen. From these screens, you can changeany field as necessary.



3. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. From thisselection, you can edit the Description field.

4. TYPE the Description.5. PRESS [ESC] when you have finished typing the

Description. The cursor should now be on the ReportingClass field.



☛ Note

The Reporting Class in Step No. 6 is the Class to whichanother Class (i.e., SubClass) or Product reports its Totalsinformation.

6. TYPE the Reporting Class. The default is Grand Totals,Class No. 999999.

7. PRESS [ENTER] to move to the Class Number field andadd another class --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return to theSupervisor Menu. (If IntraNet is turned ON, pressing[ESC] will send you to the Change Product Menu.)

☛ Note

From the Class Number field, if you enter a PLU Number,the screen will change to Change Product: All Fields Screen.You can switch back and forth between PLU’s and Classesin the Change Product and Change Class Screens.



Editing a Class In order to edit information within an existing Class:

1. From the Change Product: Unit Price Screen, TYPE theClass Number in the Product Number field.

2. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)].3. PRESS [F6] to edit the Description. Make your changes

and PRESS [ESC] and move to the Reporting Class field.

4. TYPE the new Reporting Class (if needed).5. To change another Class, PRESS [F1] or [ENTER]. This

moves the cursor to the Class Number field.

6. To exit, PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu orthe Change Product Menu if IntraNet is turned ON.



Add a New Product

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F1]2. If IntraNet, PRESS [F1]3. TYPE Product Number4. PRESS [ENTER]5. PRESS [F1]

Initially, the steps to Add a New Product and Add A NewClass are similar.

To add a new product to your PLU database:

1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select ChangeProduct.

2. If IntraNet is turned ON, PRESS [F1] to select ImmediateChanges. You should now be on the Change Product:Unit Price Screen.

3. TYPE the new Product Number in the Product Numberfield.

4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move youto the next field. A message box will appear informingyou that the Product Number you entered doesn’t exist.

5. PRESS [F1] to add the PLU as a new product.



QUICK STEPS

Continued:6. PRESS [F1], [F2] or [F3]7. PRESS [F6]8. TYPE Description9. PRESS [ESC]10. TYPE UPC Number System

(If needed)11. TYPE UPC Number /

PRESS [ENTER]12. TYPE By Count Value (If

appropriate)

6. A message box will now appear asking you to specifywhether the new PLU is a Random Weight, FixedWeight or Fluid Ounce item. PRESS [F1] to add it as aRandom Weight item -- OR -- PRESS [F2] to add it as aFixed Weight item, --OR-- PRESS [F3] to add it as a FluidOunce item. You should now be on Change Product -Page 1.

☛ Note

Random Weight includes products sold By Weight or ByCount.

This Screen Print is for a Random Weight PLU.Fixed Weight and Fluid Ounce PLU’s varyslightly.

7. To edit the product’s Description, PRESS [F6] to selectChange Text Field.



8. TYPE the Product Description. (A complete explanationof how to use the Text Editor is found in the Appendix.)

9. PRESS [ESC] to save the Description. You should nowbe on the UPC Number System field.

10. Change the UPC Number System (if needed).11. TYPE the UPC Number and PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN

ARROW (▼)].12. If the PLU is to be sold By Count, TYPE the By Count

value.



☛ Note

♦ Random Weight PLU’s with a By Count = 0 are priced asthey are weighed. A Random Weight PLU with a ByCount ≥ 1 will be priced by the count (i.e., 3 for $1.00). AFixed Weight PLU (including Fluid Ounce PLU’s musthave a By Count ≥ 1.

♦ If you enter a By Count value ≥ 1, the Tare field changesto Exception Price.

QUICK STEPS

Continued:13. TYPE Unit Price / PRESS

[ENTER]14. TYPE Tare / PRESS

[ENTER]15. TYPE Proportional Tare /

PRESS [ENTER]16. TYPE Shelf Life / PRESS

[ENTER]17. TYPE Product Life /

PRESS [ENTER]18. TYPE Class Number

13. TYPE the Unit Price and PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWNARROW (▼)].

14. TYPE the Tare value and PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWNARROW (▼)]. (See Note on next page)

15. TYPE the Proportional Tare value and PRESS [ENTER]or [DOWN ARROW (▼)]. (See Note on next page)

16. TYPE the Shelf Life value and PRESS [ENTER] or[DOWN ARROW (▼)].

17. TYPE the Product Life value and PRESS [ENTER] or[DOWN ARROW (▼)].

18. TYPE the Class Number to which this PLU Numbershould report.



☛ Note

♦ By Count, Fixed Weight and Fluid Ounce PLU’s do nothave a Tare value.

♦ The Proportional Tare field is used for candy or otheritems that are individually wrapped and then sold byweight. Proportional Tare can be defined as thepercentage of the total product weight that is the“wrapper” for the individual item. This valuerepresents the proportion of tare material in comparisonwith the gross weight of the item (commodity). For acomplete explanation of Proportional Tare (also knownas Percentage Tare) reference the Appendix.

QUICK STEPS

Continued:19. PRESS [ENTER]20. TYPE Graphic Number /

PRESS [ENTER]21. TYPE Primary Printer

Label Type No. / PRESS[ENTER]

22. TYPE Secondary PrinterLabel Type No. / PRESS[ENTER](If needed)

23. TYPE number of points (ifapplies) / PRESS [ENTER]or [▼] (If needed)

24. PRESS [ENTER]

19. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move toChange Product - Page 2.



Page 2 allows you to enter Label Information for the newPLU:

20. TYPE the Graphic Number you wish to be printed onthe product label and PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWNARROW (▼)]. (User Graphics can be viewed in theScale Setup function.)

21. TYPE the Primary Printer Label Type (A complete listand display of the Label Types available within the scalecan be found in the Scale Setup function).

22. If your system is setup to function with a SecondaryPrinter, TYPE the Secondary Printer Label Type.

23. If you have a custom label set up with the Bonus Pointsfeature, enter the number of points you want assigned.(Refer to Chapter 11 for further explanation.)

24. To move to the next field on Page 3, PRESS [ENTER] or[DOWN ARROW (▼)].

Support File Overview Page 3 allows you to create Support Files for each PLU suchas: Special Messages, Expanded Text, NutriFacts andMarquee Messages. While this information is still part ofAdding a New Product, the following pages explain indetail how to create, copy, edit, use and delete each of theavailable Support Files.



☛ Note

There are some common characteristics among the Page 3functions.

♦ Depending on the active field, if you are creating a“message” for the very first time (i.e., no SpecialMessages exist, no Expanded Text exists, no NutriFactsexist, or no Marquee Messages exist), you will be sentstraight to the Text Editor or Marquee Editor.

♦ If you have created “messages” for other PLU’s but notfor the one you’re currently working on, a screen like thefollowing appears. Notice that the Edit and Deletefunctions are disabled (because there is nothing to editor delete).



♦ The following screen appears if you have previouslycreated a “message” for the product. Notice that it listsall the PLU’s that use the current “message.”

The following table explains what each “F” Key selectionmeans. They are the same for Special Messages, ExpandedText, NutriFacts and Marquee Messages.

“F” Key Function

F1 - Create New Makes a new Special Message, ExpandedText, NutriFacts or Marquee Message.

F2 - Copy and Edit Copies Text and Format from anotherPLU; allows you to make changes to it;and saves it as a separate “message”when you press ESC.

F3 - Use Allows you to use the same Text for morethan one PLU, thus reducing memoryrequirements. This key is disabled whencreating NutriFacts information.

F4 - Edit Allows you to change a Special Message,Expanded Text, NutriFacts or MarqueeMessage.

F5 - Delete Permanently removes a Special Message,Expanded Text, NutriFacts or MarqueeMessage from scale memory.

F8 - View MoreProducts

Allows you to view additional PLU’s thatuse the particular “message.” This “F”key will only appear if more screens areneeded to view other PLU’s that use thesame “message.”



Special Messages This function allows you to create, copy from another PLU,edit, use or delete a Special Message.

(F1) Create New SpecialMessage

QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:1. Position Cursor at Special

Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F1]4. TYPE Special Message Text5. PRESS [ESC]

To Create a New Special Message:

1. Make sure the active field is the Special Message field.2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now

be on the Change Special Message Screen.

3. PRESS [F1] to select Create New.



4. TYPE the new Special Message.

5. PRESS [ESC] to save the Special Message and return toChange Product - Page 3. The Expanded Text field is nowthe active field.

☛ Note

♦ You can create a New Special Message even if onealready exists for this PLU.

♦ The size of the Special Message is determined by thelabel type(s) for the PLU. If the Label Type has a SpecialMessage field, the field determines the size. If both thePrimary and Secondary Label Types have a SpecialMessage field, the smaller field size is used. If no SpecialMessage field exists on the label, the large windowappears.



(F2) Copy and Edit SpecialMessages

This function allows you to copy and edit a Special Messagefrom another PLU. You can make changes to it and save itas a separate Special Message.

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F2]4. TYPE Product Number5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]6. TYPE new Special Message7. PRESS [ESC]

To Copy and Edit a Special Message:



3. PRESS [F2] to select Copy and Edit.



4. TYPE the Product Number of the Special Message youwant to copy.

5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view theSpecial Message.

6. If required, use the Text Editor to change the SpecialMessage. Refer to the Appendix to get a completedescription of how to use the Text Editor.




(F3) Use Special Messages

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F3]4. TYPE Product Number5. PRESS [ESC]

This selection allows you to use the same Special Messagefor numerous PLU’s. This is especially helpful in reducingthe amount of memory that’s required to store theinformation in the scale.

To access the Use Special Message function:



3. PRESS [F3] to select Use.



4. TYPE the Product Number of the Special Message youwant to use.

5. PRESS [ENTER] to save the change. The cursor movesautomatically to the Expanded Text field.

(F4) Edit Special Messages

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F4]4. PRESS [F5] or [F7] (If

necessary)5. Edit Special Message Text6. PRESS [ESC]

This function allows you to edit a previously created SpecialMessage.


be on the Change Special Message Screen that details theProducts that use this Special Message.



3. PRESS [F4] to select Edit.

4. When you select Edit, you will be asked if you areediting the Special Message for this product only or forall of the products that use this Special Message. (Thisscreen will only appear if there are other PLU’s that usethis Special Message.)

5. If there are no other PLU’s that use the Special Message,the scale goes directly to the Text Editor.

6. PRESS [F5] to edit the Special Message for All Products --- OR -- PRESS [F7] to edit the Special Message for ThisProduct Only.



7. Use the Text Editor to edit the Special Message. Refer tothe Appendix to get a complete description of how touse the Text Editor.


(F5) Delete Special Message

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F5]4. Confirm All or This PLU

Only (If necessary)5. PRESS [F5] or [F7] (If

needed)6. Verify Deletion7. PRESS [ESC] to exit

Change Product

This selection permanently removes the Special Messagefrom the scale’s memory.

To Delete a Special Message:


be on the Change Special Message Screen that details theProducts that use this Special Message.



3. PRESS [F5] to select Delete. If the Special Message is notused by any other PLU, then it will be deletedimmediately.

4. If several PLU’s use the same Special Message, whenyou select Delete, you will be asked if you are deletingthe Special Message for this product only or for all of theproducts that use this Special Message.

5. PRESS [F5] to Delete the Special Message for AllProducts -- OR -- PRESS [F7] to Delete the SpecialMessage for This Product Only.



6. Verify that the Special Message was deleted. The cursorautomatically moves to the Expanded Text field.

Expanded Text From this selection, you can create, copy from another PLU,edit, use or delete Expanded Text.

☛ Note

Before you begin working with Expanded Text, verifywhether Word Wrap is On or Off. Refer to Using Word Wrapin Chapter 7 for a detailed explanation.

(F1) Create New ExpandedText

To Create Expanded Text:

1. Make sure the active field is the Expanded Text field.



QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:1. Position Cursor at

Expanded Text field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F1]4. TYPE new Expanded Text5. PRESS [ESC]

2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should nowbe on the Change Expanded Text Screen. (Remember, thescreen that appears depends on previous Expanded Textentries.)


4. TYPE the new Expanded Text.



5. PRESS [ESC] to save the Expanded Text and return toChange Product - Page 3. The NutriFacts field is now theactive field.

(F2) Copy and EditExpanded Text

This function allows you to copy and edit Expanded Textfrom another PLU. You can make changes to it and save itas a separate Expanded Text file.

QUICK STEPS


Expanded Text field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F2]4. TYPE Product Number5. PRESS [ENTER]6. TYPE new Expanded Text7. PRESS [ESC]

To Copy and Edit Expanded Text:

1. Make sure the active field is the Expanded Text field.2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now

be on the Change Expanded Text Screen.




4. TYPE the Product Number of the Expanded Text youwant to copy.



5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view theExpanded Text.

6. If required, use the Text Editor to change the ExpandedText. Refer to the Appendix to get a completedescription of how to use the Text Editor.

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the Expanded Text and return toChange Product - Page 3. The NutriFacts field is now theactive field.

✎ Tip

If the all the Expanded Text information will be used onanother PLU, select Use (F3) to reduce the memoryrequirements.



(F3) Use Expanded Text

QUICK STEPS


Expanded Text field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F3]4. TYPE Product Number5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]

This selection allows you to use the same Expanded Text fornumerous PLU’s. This is especially helpful in reducing theamount of memory that’s required to store the informationin the scale.

Expanded text can be automatically adjusted to fit the widthof the field when changing label types if there are nocarriage returns in the expanded text. Refer to Using WordWrap in chapter 7 for further explanation.

To access the Use Expanded Text function:


be on the Change Expanded Text Screen.




4. TYPE the Product Number of the Expanded Text youwant to use.

5. PRESS [ENTER] to save the change. The cursor movesautomatically to the NutriFacts field.

(F4) Edit Expanded Text

QUICK STEPS


Expanded Text field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F4]4. PRESS [F5] or [F7]5. Edit Expanded Text6. PRESS [ESC]

This function allows you to edit previously createdExpanded Text.


be on the Change Expanded Text Screen that details theProducts that use this Expanded Text.




4. When you select Edit, you will be asked if you areediting the Expanded Text for this product only or for allof the products that use this Expanded Text. (Thisscreen only appears if more than one (1) PLU uses theExpanded Text.)

5. If there are no other PLU’s that use the Expanded Text,the scale goes directly to the Text Editor.

6. PRESS [F5] to edit the Expanded Text for All Products-- OR -- PRESS [F7] to edit the Expanded Text for ThisProduct Only.



7. Use the Text Editor to edit the Expanded Text. Refer tothe Appendix to get a complete description of how touse the Text Editor.

8. When finished, PRESS [ESC] to save the Expanded Textand return to Change Product - Page 3. The NutriFactsfield is now the active field.



(F5) Delete Expanded Text

QUICK STEPS


Expanded Text field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F5]4. Confirm All or This PLU

Only (If necessary)5. PRESS [F5] or [F7] (If


Change Product

This selection permanently removes Expanded Text fromthe scale’s memory.

To Delete Expanded Text:


be on the Change Expanded Text Screen that details theProducts that use this Expanded Text.

3. PRESS [F5] to select Delete.



4. If the Expanded Text is not used by any other PLU, thenit will be deleted immediately.

5. If several PLU’s use the same Expanded Text, when youselect Delete, you will be asked if you are deleting theExpanded Text for this product only or for all of theproducts that use this Expanded Text.

6. PRESS [F5] to Delete the Expanded Text for All Products-- OR -- PRESS [F7] to Delete the Expanded Text for ThisProduct Only.

7. Verify that the Expanded Text was deleted.

8. The cursor moves automatically to the NutriFacts field.



NutriFacts Data This function allows you to create, edit, copy or deleteNutriFacts Data for a PLU. NutriFacts Data is specific toone (1) PLU only. You can copy information from one PLUto another; however, it then becomes unique for that PLU.

☛ Note

Before you can enter NutriFacts, you must select a Primaryor Secondary Printer Label Type that will print NutriFactsinformation. A complete list of Label Types that will allowyou to print NutriFacts information is found in Chapter 7.

The FDA Nutrifacts secondary label defaults to 0 whenprinting on label types smaller than the default primarylabel type.

If you select a Label Type that does not print NutriFactsdata, then the Change Text Field option will be disabledwhen the active field is NutriFacts.



(F1) Create New NutriFactsData

QUICK STEPS


NutriFacts field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F1]4. TYPE NutriFacts Data5. PRESS [ESC]

To Create NutriFacts Data:

1. Make sure the active field is the NutriFacts field.2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now

be on the Change NutriFacts Data Screen.




4. TYPE the new NutriFacts data.

5. PRESS [ESC] to save the NutriFacts and return to ChangeProduct - Page 3. The Marquee Message field is now theactive field.

(F2) Copy and EditNutriFacts Data

This function allows you to copy and edit NutriFacts datafrom another PLU. You can make changes to it and save itas separate NutriFacts.

QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:1. Position Cursor at the

NutriFacts field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F2]4. TYPE Product Number5. PRESS [ENTER]6. TYPE NutriFacts Data7. PRESS [ESC]

To Copy and Edit NutriFacts Data:






4. TYPE the Product Number of the NutriFacts data youwant to copy.



5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view theNutriFacts data.

6. Change the necessary fields. PRESS [ENTER] or[DOWN ARROW (▼) to move to the next field.

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the NutriFacts and return to ChangeProduct - Page 3. The Marquee Messages field is now theactive field. Remember that the NutriFacts data is nowsaved for this PLU only.

☛ Note

Because NutriFacts data is unique for each PLU, the Useoption (F3) is not available.



(F4) Edit NutriFacts Data

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F4]4. Edit NutriFacts Data5. PRESS [ESC]

This function allows you to edit previously createdNutriFacts Data.






4. Use the ARROW KEYS to move the cursor to the fieldsyou need to edit. TYPE the new NutriFacts data.

5. PRESS [ESC] to save the NutriFacts and return to ChangeProduct - Page 3. The Marquee Message field is now theactive field.

(F5) Delete NutriFacts Data

QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:1. Position Cursor at the

NutriFacts field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F5]4. Verify Deletion

This selection permanently removes the NutriFacts Datafrom the scale’s memory.

To Delete NutriFacts Data:






4. Verify on the Change Product - Page 3 Screen that theNutriFacts data was deleted. The NutriFacts box shouldnow read No NutriFacts Data. The cursor is now on theMarquee Message field.



Marquee Messages Marquee Messages can be created for each product withinyour scale system. They can be constructed in numerousways to gain customer attention. Depending on yourmerchandising strategy, you may setup the MarqueeMessage to display the following characteristics:

“F” Command PurposeMarquee Editor F1 - Scroll This command moves each character

in the text group from right to leftacross the display. (See note on nextpage.)

F2 - Frame This command displays the text groupwithout moving characters to newpositions.

F3 - Blink On/Blink Off The Blink On/Off toggle blinks thetext group surrounded by Blink Onand Blink Off at 1.0 blinks per second.

F4 - Clear The Clear command clears the display.

F5 - Hold In the Scroll mode, this commandfreezes the display for one (1) second.In the Frame mode, it adds one (1)second to the display time.

F6 - Roll This command rolls the message off tothe left before proceeding withadditional information.

F7 - Scroll/Frame Speed When in the Scroll mode, you canchoose from the following speeds:♦ Slow - 2 Characters/Second♦ Normal - 3 Characters/Second♦ Quick - 4 Characters/Second♦ XQuick - 5 Characters/Second

When in the Frame mode, you canchoose from the following speeds:♦ Slow - 2.0 Seconds/Frame♦ Normal - 1.5 Seconds/Frame♦ Quick - 1.0 Second/Frame♦ XQuick - 0.5 Seconds/Frame

F8 - Start/Stop MarqueeTest

This function allows you to start orstop the Marquee Message preview onthe Control Panel Display.



☛ Note

The term Text Block refers to an entire Marquee Message,words within a message or characters within a message. Inthe following explanation, the word is usedinterchangeably.

✎ Tip

If you want a text block to perform a function, you must firstenter the command, then type the marquee message textblock.



(F1) Create New MarqueeMessage

QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:1. Position Cursor at Marquee

Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F1]4. TYPE Marquee Message

Text5. Use the Marquee Editor (If

needed)6. PRESS [F8] / PRESS [F8]7. PRESS [ESC]

To Create a New Marquee Message:

1. Make sure the active field is the Marquee Message field.2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now

be on the Change Marquee Message Screen.




4. TYPE the new Marquee Message.5. If required, use the Marquee Editor to set Marquee

Message characteristics. Refer to the Appendix to get acomplete description of how to use the Marquee Editor.

6. To view the Marquee Message, PRESS [F8] to select StartMarquee Test. PRESS [F8] again to stop the preview.

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the Marquee Message and return toChange Product - Page 1. The Product Number field isnow the active field.



(F2) Copy and Edit MarqueeMessages

This function allows you to copy and edit a MarqueeMessage from another PLU. You can make changes to itand save it as a separate Marquee Message.

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F2]4. TYPE Product Number5. PRESS [F8]6. TYPE new Marquee

Message7. PRESS [ESC]

To Copy and Edit a Marquee Message:






4. TYPE the Product Number of the Marquee Message youwant to copy.

5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view theMarquee Message.

6. PRESS [F8] to select Start Marquee Test. This allows youto view the Marquee Message (in the Box at the bottomof the display) as it will appear on the Marquee Display.



7. If required, use the Marquee Editor to change theMarquee Message display characteristics. Refer to theAppendix to get a complete description of how to usethe Marquee Editor.

8. PRESS [ESC] to save the Marquee Message and return toChange Product - Page 1. The Product Number field isnow the active field.

(F3) Use Marquee Messages

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F3]4. TYPE Product Number5. PRESS [ESC]

This selection allows you to use the same Marquee Messagefor numerous PLU’s. This is especially helpful in reducingthe amount of memory that’s required to store theinformation in the scale.

To access the Use Marquee Message function:






4. TYPE the Product Number of the Marquee Message youwant to use.

5. PRESS [ENTER] to save the change. The cursor movesautomatically to the Product Number field on ChangeProduct - Page 1.



(F4) Edit Marquee Messages

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F4]4. PRESS [F5] or [F7]5. Edit Marquee Message

Text and Format6. PRESS [ESC]

This function allows you to edit a previously createdMarquee Message.


be on the Change Marquee Message Screen that detailsthe Products that use this Marquee Message.




4. When you select Edit, you will be asked if you areediting the Marquee Message for this product only or forall of the products that use this Marquee Message.

5. If there are no other PLU’s that use the MarqueeMessage, the scale goes directly to the Marquee Editor.

6. PRESS [F5] to edit the Marquee Message for AllProducts -- OR -- PRESS [F7] to edit the MarqueeMessage for This Product Only.

7. Use the Marquee Editor to edit the Marquee Messagedisplay characteristics. Refer to the Appendix to get acomplete description of how to use the Marquee Editor.

8. PRESS [ESC] to save the Marquee Message and return tothe Change Product - Page 1. The Product Number fieldis now the active field.



(F5) Delete MarqueeMessages

QUICK STEPS


Message field2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F5]4. Confirm All or This

Product Only (If needed)5. PRESS [F5] or [F7] (if


Change Product

This selection permanently removes the Marquee Messagefrom the scale’s memory.

To Delete a Marquee Message:


be on the Change Marquee Message Screen that detailsthe Products that use this Marquee Message.


4. If the Marquee Message is not used by any other PLU,then it will be deleted immediately.

5. If several PLU’s use the same Marquee Message, whenyou select Delete, you will be asked if you are deletingthe Marquee Message for this product only or for all ofthe products that use this Marquee Message.



6. PRESS [F5] to Delete the Marquee Message for AllProducts -- OR -- PRESS [F7] to Delete the MarqueeMessage for This Product Only.

7. The cursor moves automatically to the Product Numberfield on Change Product - Page 1. To verify that theMarquee Message was deleted, PRESS [UP ARROW(▲)] or [PREV] to return to Change Product - Page 3. Ifthe deletion took place, the Marquee Message fieldshould be empty.

8. PRESS [ESC] to return to Change Product - Page 1.



Time Stamp Changes

QUICK STEPS

From the Change Product Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. TYPE Date (MM/DD/YY)3. PRESS [ENTER]4. TYPE Time (HH:MM)5. PRESS [F3] - If Needed6. PRESS [F1]

As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, a differentscreen appears if IntraNet is ON when you PRESS [F1] toselect Change Product from the Supervisor Menu. From thismenu, you may select to make changes immediately or at aspecified time and date. By selecting Time Stamp Changes[F2], you are able to log onto any Quantum Scale in thedepartment and specify a date and time that you want thechanges to take place. Then, enter the changes that will takeeffect at that specified date and time. Keep in mind thatthese changes will affect all the Quantum Scales in thedepartment networked by IntraNet.

To specify a specific date and time for changes to take place:

1. PRESS [F2] on the Change Product Menu.

2. TYPE the Date as a six digit number (MM/DD/YY).3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Time field.4. TYPE the Time as a four digit number (HH:MM).5. PRESS [F3] to change AM/PM as necessary.



☛ Note

In the event you have previously set a time for changes tooccur and that time hasn’t arrived, the following screen willappear.



6. When you have the correct Date and Time, PRESS [F1]to Begin Making Changes. When you press [F1], you arethen sent to the Change Product: Unit Price Screen.

7. Proceed making necessary changes as you would if youwere making changes to take effect immediately.

☛ Note

All product changes will be recorded until you exit theChange Product functions. The bottom of the ChangeProduct Screen shows you the date and time you’ve selectedfor the changes to take effect.



Making Changes toProduct Information

In previous sections of this chapter, you learned how to Adda New Class, Edit a Class and Add a New Product. For theremainder of the chapter, we’re going to focus on MakingChanges to Product Information (i.e., editing a PLU record).

The Change Product function is designed so that you caneasily change:• One specific field * Unit Price * Tare * Shelf Life/Product Life * Class• All Price Fields• All fields• Batch Price Changes (Specific Range of PLU’s)



Accessing the ChangeProduct Menu Screen

To access the Change Product Menu Screen:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select ChangeProduct.

2. If you are on the Change Product Screen, PRESS [F1] toselect Immediate Changes --OR-- PRESS [F2] to selectTime Stamp Changes. You should now be on theChange Product: Unit Price Screen.



3. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field. You shouldnow be on the Change Product Selection Menu Screen.



(F1) Changing the Unit Price

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F1]2. PRESS [F1] or [F2] (If

needed)3. TYPE Product Number4. PRESS [ENTER]5. Verify Description6. TYPE Unit Price7. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

To change only the Unit Price of a product:

1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1]. You are now onthe Change Product Screen.

2. If IntraNet is turned ON, select Immediate or TimeStamp Changes. The system defaults to the ChangeProduct: Unit Price Screen.

3. TYPE the Product Number you want to change.4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Unit Price field.5. Verify the Description of the product you want to

change.6. TYPE the Unit Price.



7. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number fieldso you can change another PLU or PRESS [ESC] to savethe changes and return to the Supervisor Menu or to theChange Product Menu if IntraNet is ON.

☛ Note

If you need to Delete, Change Another Field or Add a NewProduct Number, refer to those sections previously in thismanual.

(F2) Changing Tare

QUICK STEPS

From the Change ProductSelection Menu Screen:1. PRESS [F1]2. PRESS [F1] or [F2] (If

needed)3. PRESS [F5]4. PRESS [F2]5. TYPE Product Number6. PRESS [ENTER]7. Verify Description8. TYPE Tare Weight Value9. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

From the Change Product: Tare Screen, you can change onlythe Tare weight of a product.

To change only the Tare weight:

1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1]. You are now onthe Change Product Screen.

2. If IntraNet is turned ON, select Immediate or TimeStamp Changes. The system defaults to the ChangeProduct: Unit Price Screen.

3. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field.



4. PRESS [F2] to select Tare.

5. TYPE the Product Number you want to change.6. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Tare field.7. Verify the Description of the product.

8. TYPE the new Tare Weight.9. TYPE the new Proportional Tare value.10. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field

so you can change another PLU or PRESS [ESC] to savethe changes and return to the Supervisor Menu or theChange Product Menu if IntraNet is turned ON.



☛ Note

By Count and Fixed Weight PLU’s do not have a tare. If youenter a By Count or Fixed Weight PLU Number, a messagewindows appears alerting you to this fact.



☛ Note

The Tare field may be shown as Forced Tare and/or PlatterTare. Platter Tare may be configured in the Service Modeduring the initial scale set-up.

1. If configured, each Random Weight PLU may be set-upwith Forced Tare or Platter Tare.

Operating in Forced TareMode

If you are operating in the Forced Tare Mode:

1. With the cursor on the Tare field, PRESS [CLEAR]. Thefield name changes to Forced Tare.

2. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field orPRESS [ESC] to exit and return to the Supervisor MenuScreen.

Operating in Platter TareMode

If you are operating in the Platter Tare Mode:

1. With the cursor on the Tare field, place the platterpackage container on the Scale Platter. The scale willautomatically insert the Tare value.

2. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number fieldor PRESS [ESC] to exit and return to the SupervisorMenu Screen.



(F3) Changing ShelfLife/Product Life

QUICK STEPS

From the Change ProductSelection Menu Screen:1. PRESS [F3]2. TYPE Product Number3. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]4. Verify Description5. TYPE Shelf Life Value6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]7. TYPE Product Life Value8. PRESS [F1] or [ESC]

From this screen, you can change the Shelf Life and ProductLife of a product.

To change the Shelf Life/Product Life:

1. PRESS [F3] to select Shelf Life.

2. TYPE the Product Number you want to change3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Shelf Life field.4. Verify the Description of the product.



5. TYPE the new Shelf Life Number.6. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Product Life field.7. TYPE the new Product Life Number.8. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field

or PRESS [ESC] to exit and return to the Change ProductMenu Screen.

(F4) Changing a Product’sReporting Class

From this screen, you can change a Product’s ReportingClass.

✎ Tip

A Class Structure is necessary to fully utilize the ProductLookUp Library (HELP) in the Operate Mode. Refer to theAppendix to view a typical Class Structure.



QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F4]2. TYPE Product Number3. PRESS [ENTER]4. Verify Description5. TYPE new Class Number6. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

To change a product’s Reporting Class:

1. PRESS [F4] to select Class.

2. TYPE the Product Number you want to change.3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW].4. Verify the Product Description.

5. TYPE the new Class Number.6. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field

or PRESS [ESC] to exit and return to the Change ProductMenu Screen.



(F6) Changing All PriceFields

QUICK STEPS

From the Change ProductSelection Menu Screen:1. PRESS [F6]2. TYPE Product Number3. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]4. Verify Description5. Follow PLU Type

Guidelines

The All Price Fields selection allows you to change all pricerelated information for a product.

To access All Price Fields:

1. PRESS [F6] to select All Price Fields.

2. TYPE the Product Number.3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the next field.4. Verify the Description of the product you want to

change.5. Follow the guidelines for changing the price fields based

on the PLU type (i.e., Items Sold By Weight, By Count,or Fixed Weight)



Random Weight PLU’s

QUICK STEPS

From the Change ProductScreen:1. TYPE By Count Value2. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]3. TYPE Unit Price Value4. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]5. TYPE Tare Weight, Platter

Tare or Forced Tare Value6. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]7. TYPE Proportional Tare

Value8. PRESS [ESC]

1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 from the Changing All Price Fieldssection to prepare to change a Random Weight PLU.

2. TYPE the By Count Number of Zero (0).3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Unit Price field.4. TYPE the Unit Price.5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Tare field.6. TYPE the Tare Weight, Platter Tare or Forced Tare

Value.7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Proportional Tare field.8. TYPE the Proportional Tare Value.9. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field

or [ESC] to save the changes.



By Count PLU’s

QUICK STEPS

From the Change ProductScreen:1. TYPE By Count Value > 22. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]3. TYPE Unit Price Value4. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]5. TYPE Exception Price

Value6. PRESS [ESC]

1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 from the All Price Fields section toprepare to change an Item Sold By Count.

2. TYPE the By Count Number of two (2) or more.3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to


the Exception Price field.6. TYPE the Exception Price.7. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field




Fixed Weight PLU’s

QUICK STEPS

From the Change ProductScreen:1. TYPE By Count Value2. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]3. TYPE Unit Price Value4. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]5. TYPE Net Weight Value6. PRESS [ESC]

1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 from the All Price Fields section toprepare to change an Item Sold By Fixed Weight.

2. TYPE the By Count Number.3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to


the Net Weight field.6. TYPE the Net Weight (oz. or kg).7. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field




Fluid Ounce PLU’s

QUICK STEPS

From the Change ProductScreen:

1. Complete Steps 1 - 52. TYPE the By Count3. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]4. TYPE the Unit Price5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]6. TYPE the Fluid Ounce

value7. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

To change all the price fields on a Fluid Ounce PLU:

1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 from the All Price Fields section toprepare to change an Item Sold By Fluid Ounce.

2. TYPE the By Count Number.3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to


the Fluid Ounce field.6. TYPE the Fluid Ounce value (oz.).7. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field


☛ Note

You will notice common changes to the screen when youenter certain PLU types.

♦ Tare will change to Exception Price if By Count equals 1or higher.

♦ Tare will change to Net Weight (oz. or kg) if it is a FixedWeight PLU.

♦ Tare will change to Fluid Ounces if it is a Fluid OuncePLU.



(F7) Changing All Fields A complete explanation of how to change All Fields is foundin the Add a New Product section of this chapter. Refer tothis section for a complete explanation of using this “F” Key.

(F8) Making Batch PriceChanges

QUICK STEPS

From Change Product SelectionMenu Screen:1. PRESS [F8]

Batch Price Changes gives you the ability to change the priceof a range of PLU’s at one time. The range can bedetermined by either Class or a Range of PLU Numbers.The price change can be handled as either an Increase orDecrease; and by percentage or fixed dollar amount.

To access Batch Price Changes:

1. PRESS [F8] on the Change Product Selection Menu toselect Batch Price Changes. You should now be on theBatch Price Changes Screen.



Batch Price Changes –By Class

QUICK STEPS

From Batch Price ChangesScreen:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F4]4. TYPE Dollar Amount or

Percentage Change5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]6. TYPE Class Number7. PRESS [F1]8. PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Batch Price Changes Screen, PRESS [F5] toselect By Class.

2. PRESS [F3] to toggle between Increase or Decrease.3. PRESS [F4] to toggle between By Dollar Amount or By

Percentage.4. TYPE the Dollar Amount --OR-- Percentage Change.



5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to theClass field.

6. TYPE the Class Number where you want the changes tooccur. This will change the Price of all the products thatreport to the entered Class Number.

7. PRESS [F1] to Begin Making Changes. If for some reasonyou need to stop the changes, PRESS [F1] again to StopMaking Changes.

8. When the changes have been made, PRESS [ESC] toreturn to the Change Product Menu Screen.



Batch Price Changes –By PLU Range

QUICK STEPS

From the Batch Price ChangeScreen:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F4]4. TYPE Dollar Amount or

Percentage Change5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]6. TYPE the beginning

Product Number7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]8. TYPE the ending Product

Number9. PRESS [F1]10. PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Batch Price Changes Screen, PRESS [F5] to selectBy PLU Range.

2. PRESS [F3] to toggle between Increase or Decrease.3. PRESS [F4] to toggle between By Dollar Amount or By

Percentage.4. TYPE the Dollar Amount --OR-- Percentage Change.



5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to theBegin Changes at Product Number field.

6. TYPE the beginning Product Number.7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to the

End Changes at Product Number field.8. TYPE the ending Product Number.9. PRESS [F1] to Begin Making Changes. If for some reason

you need to stop the changes, PRESS [F1] again to StopMaking Changes.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Change Product MenuScreen.



Setting Up a Forced PricePLU

Forced price means that the PLU is set up to force theOperator to enter a price before the product can be weighed.You can set up a forced price for Random Weight, FixedWeight, or By Count PLUs.

Fixed Weight or By Count PLUs recalculate the total pricewhen by count is changed.

☛ Note

You cannot use a forced price PLU in Self Service mode.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F1]2. Enter the PLU3. PRESS [ENTER] or

[DOWN ARROW]4. At Unit Price field, PRESS

[CLEAR]5. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

To set up a forced price PLU:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select ChangeProduct.

2. Enter the PLU in the Product Number field.3. If this is an existing PLU, PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN

ARROW] to move to the Unit Price field.--OR--If this is a new PLU, a message displays informing youthat the Product Number you entered doesn’t exist.A. PRESS [F1] to add the PLU as a new product. A

message displays asking you to specify whether thenew PLU is a Random Weight, Fixed Weight or FluidOunce item.

B. PRESS [F1] to add it as a Random Weight item-- OR -- PRESS [F2] to add it as a Fixed Weight item,--OR-- PRESS [F3] to add it as a Fluid Ounce item.

C. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW] to move to theUnit Price field.

☛ Note

Verify that the Number System is set to 02 in order to createa forced price PLU.

4. With the cursor on the Unit Price field, PRESS [CLEAR].The field name changes to Forced Price.

5. PRESS [ENTER] to continue changing the productinformation or PRESS [ESC] to exit.


4 - 1 Totals Menu

Chapter Four: Totals Menu

♦ Totals Menu Overview♦ View Totals♦ Clear Totals♦ Void Totals♦ Configure Totals Type♦ Collect Totals via MiniNet II


Totals Menu 4 - 2

Totals Menu Flowchart

TOTALSMENU

PRESS [F2]T o t a l sMenu

View Totals (F1)

Product (F1)

Operator (F2)

Hourly (F3)

Weight & Price (F4)

Packages & Runs (F5)

Items (F6)

Clear Totals Menu

(F2)

All Product’s Totals

(F1)

One Product’sTotals

(F2)

One TotalsType for All

Products (F3)

All Operator Totals

(F5)

All Hourly Totals

(F6)

All Totals (F8)

Void Totals (F3)

Product Totals

(F1)

Operator Totals

(F2)

Hourly Totals

(F3)

Totals Type (F5)

Void (F8)

Configure Totals Types

(F4)

Create a Type (F1)

Edit This Type (F3)

Delete This Type (F5)


4 - 3 Totals Menu

Totals MenuSupervisor Menu“F” Key = F2

From the Totals Menu, you can complete the following:♦ View Product, Operator, or Hourly Totals♦ Clear Product, Operator, or Hourly Totals♦ Void Product, Operator, or Hourly Totals♦ Configure (Create, Edit or Delete) up to seven (7) Totals

Types♦ Collect Totals from other Quantum Scales if a MiniNet II

network is installed

An explanation of each is listed in the following table:

Mode Function

View Totals Allows you to look at specific Product,Operator and Hourly Totals.

Clear Totals Menu Allows you to designate which Totalsyou want to delete from the records.

Void Totals Allows you to make an adjustment toProduct, Operator and Hourly Totalsinformation in the event an error wasmade in the Operate Mode.

Configure Totals Types Allows you to create, edit and delete upto seven (7) Totals Types that you needto track Totals information in youroperation. The Production Totals typecannot be changed.

Collect Totals ViaMiniNet II

Allows you to collect Totals informationif a MiniNet II network is installed.


Totals Menu 4 - 4

What are Totals? In order to effectively use the Totals Menu Screens, youmust understand what Totals are and the differentcomponents that make up a Totals record.

Totals can be defined as the accumulation of weight, price(value), packages, runs and items for a given PLU or Class.

There are several different components of a Totals record:

♦ Weight: The total amount of a product weighed (for agiven PLU or Class)

♦ Price: The total value of product weighed (for a givenPLU or Class)

♦ Packages: The total number of packages processed (for agiven PLU or Class)

♦ Runs: Primarily used in the PrePackaged Productsmode, a “Run” is created every time you go into and exitthe Run Screen.

♦ Items: The total count of product’s sold; for everyRandom Weight package it adds one item; for every ByCount package it adds the By Count value.


4 - 5 Totals Menu

QUICK STEPS

From the Start a Run Screen:1. PRESS [SUPER MENU

ON/OFF]2. TYPE ID Number and

PRESS [ENTER] (Ifrequired)

3. PRESS [F2]

To access the Totals Menu:

1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [SUPER MENUON/OFF].

2. TYPE your Secret ID Number (if required) and PRESS[ENTER].

3. (From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select TotalsMenu. You should now be on the Totals Menu.


Totals Menu 4 - 6

☛ Note

The options that are available in the Totals Menu aredependent upon whether Totals actually exist and theconfiguration of the scale.

For example, the following screen appears if no totals existand you have configured the scale for MiniNet II. Noticethat View Totals, Clear Totals Menu and Void Totals aredisabled selections.

Collect Totals via MiniNet will not be shown on the screen ifyou have not configured MiniNet II in Scale Setup. Refer tothe Scale Setup chapter for a complete explanation of how toconfigure the scale for MiniNet II communication.


4 - 7 Totals Menu

(F1) View Totals From this option, you can view the following totals(provided Totals exist):♦ Product♦ Operator♦ Hourly View Totals allows you to display total weight, total price,total packages, total runs, and the total items for a Product,an Operator or for any hour of the day.

The table below gives you the definitions for each.

Term Definition

Product Totals This option displays totals information forany product number. You must enablethe collection of Product Totals duringScale Setup. This applies to all totals thatwere accumulated since the last time theywere cleared.

Operator Totals This option displays totals information byOperator Number (if configured). Youmust enable the collection of OperatorTotals during Scale Setup. This applies toall totals that were accumulated since thelast time they were cleared.

Hourly Totals This option displays Hourly Totalsinformation in a 24-hour breakdown.You must enable the collection of HourlyTotals during Scale Setup. This applies toall totals that were accumulated since thelast time they were cleared.


Totals Menu 4 - 8

(F1) View Product Totals

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F1]3. TYPE Product Number4. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]5. Verify the Product

Description6. PRESS [F5]7. PRESS [F6]8. PRESS [PRINT]9. PRESS [ESC]

To View Product Totals:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select TotalsMenu.

2. PRESS [F1] to select View Totals. The display defaults toProduct Totals provided Product Totals is setup to becollected.


4 - 9 Totals Menu

3. TYPE the Product Number in the Product Number box.4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view the

Product Totals. The default will display the Weight andPrice Totals.

5. Verify the correct Description for the Product Totals.

6. If you want to view the number of packages and runsprocessed for this PLU, PRESS [F5] to select Packagesand Runs.


Totals Menu 4 - 10

7. If you want to view the total number of items processedfor this PLU (i.e., By Count), PRESS [F6] to select Items.

☛ Note

If the PLU is not a By Count PLU, each transaction counts asone (1) item.

8. PRESS [PRINT] to produce a label(s) with the displayedtotals.

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Totals Menu.


4 - 11 Totals Menu

(F2) View Operator Totals

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F1]3. PRESS [F2]4. PRESS [F5]5. PRESS [F6]6. PRESS [PRINT]7. PRESS [ESC]

To View Operator Totals:


2. PRESS [F1] to select View Totals. The display defaults toView Product Totals.


Totals Menu 4 - 12

3. PRESS [F2] to select Operator Totals. The display showsthe Weight and Price of all Operator transactionsprocessed.

4. If you want to view the number of packages and runsprocessed by the Operators, PRESS [F5] to selectPackages and Runs.

5. If you want to view the total number of items processedby the Operators (i.e., By Count), PRESS [F6] to selectItems.

☛ Note

If more Operator Totals exist than can fit on once screen, F8will be enabled to display the next page of Operator Totals.[PREV] and [NEXT] can be used to move between pages aswell.


4 - 13 Totals Menu

☛ Note


6. PRESS [PRINT] to produce labels with the displayedtotals.



Totals Menu 4 - 14

(F3) View Hourly Totals

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F1]3. PRESS [F3]4. PRESS [F5]5. PRESS [F6]6. PRESS [PRINT]7. PRESS [ESC]

To View Hourly Totals:


2. PRESS [F1] to select View Totals. The display defaults toProduct Totals.


4 - 15 Totals Menu

3. PRESS [F3] to select Hourly Totals. The display showsin one (1) hour intervals the production totals by thehour (default is Weight/Price).

4. If you want to view the number of packages and runsprocessed at a particular hour of the day, PRESS [F5] toselect Packages and Runs.

5. If you want to view the total number of items processedat a particular hour of the day (i.e., By Count), PRESS[F6] to select Items.

☛ Note



Totals Menu 4 - 16

6. PRESS [PRINT] to produce a label for each hour that hasnon-zero totals.



4 - 17 Totals Menu

(F2) Clear Totals From this option, you can do the following:♦ Clear All Product Totals♦ Clear All Totals for a Selected Item♦ Clear All Totals for a Selected Totals Type♦ Clear All Operator Totals♦ Clear All Hourly Totals♦ Clear All Product, Operator and Hourly Totals

simultaneously

The table below gives you the definition and outcome of theselected function.

Term Definition

Clear All Product Totals Clears item totals for all productswithout affecting Operator or HourlyTotals.

One Product’s Totals Clears all Totals Types for the itemselected.

One Totals Type for AllProducts

Clears all the totals for the Totals Typeselected.

All Operator Totals Clears all operator totals withoutaffecting Product or Hourly Totals.

All Hourly Totals Clears hourly totals (for all 24 hours)without affecting Product or OperatorTotals.

All Totals Clears all Product, Operator andHourly Totals.


Totals Menu 4 - 18

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F2]

To access the Clear Totals Menu:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select theTotals Menu.

2. PRESS [F2] to select the Clear Totals Menu. You shouldnow be on the Clear Totals Menu.


4 - 19 Totals Menu

(F1) Clear All ProductTotals

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:1. PRESS [F1]2. PRESS [F1]3. PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F1] to select AllProduct Totals.

2. From the Clear All Product Totals Screen, PRESS [F1] toselect Clear These Totals.

3. When finished, Press Any Key to return to the ClearTotals Menu.


Totals Menu 4 - 20

(F2) Clear One Product’sTotals

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. TYPE the Product Number3. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]4. Verify Product Description5. PRESS [F5]6. PRESS [F6]7. PRESS [F1]8. PRESS Any Key9. PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F2] to select OneProduct’s Totals. You should now be on the Clear OneProduct’s Totals Screen.

2. TYPE the Product Number of the item you want to clear.


4 - 21 Totals Menu

3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to enter theProduct Number.

4. Verify the Product Description.5. View the Totals that will be cleared. PRESS [F5] to view

the Packages and Runs Totals.6. PRESS [F6] to view the Items Totals.

7. PRESS [F1] to Clear These Totals.8. After the Totals have been cleared, Press Any Key to

return to the Clear One Product’s Totals Screen.

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Clear Totals Menu--OR-- enter another product whose totals you want toclear.


Totals Menu 4 - 22

(F3) Clear One ‘Totals Type’for All Products

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:1. PRESS [F3]2. TYPE the Product Number3. PRESS [▲] or [▼] to move

cursor4. PRESS [F1]5. Verify Totals Type selected6. PRESS [F1]7. PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F3]. You shouldnow be on the Clear One Totals Type for All ProductsScreen.

2. PRESS the [UP ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)]to move the cursor to the Totals Type you want to clear.

3. When the correct Totals Type is highlighted, PRESS [F1]to choose Select This Totals Type.

☛ Note

If the Totals Type is grayed so that you cannot select it, itmeans that there is no totals information for that TotalsType.


4 - 23 Totals Menu

4. Verify that the listed Totals Type is the one you want toclear.

5. To complete the function, PRESS [F1] to select ClearThese Totals.

6. Press Any Key to return to the Clear One Totals Type forAll Products Screen to select another Totals Type.

7. When finished, PRESS [ESC] to return to the Clear TotalsMenu.


Totals Menu 4 - 24

(F5) Clear All OperatorTotals

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. View Totals3. PRESS [F5]4. PRESS [F6]5. PRESS [F1]6. PRESS Any Key7. PRESS [ESC]

To Clear All Operator Totals:

1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F5] to select AllOperator Totals.

2. View the Totals.3. If you want to view Packages and Runs, PRESS [F5].4. If you want to view Items, PRESS [F6].5. To clear the totals, PRESS [F1].


4 - 25 Totals Menu

6. When the Clear is complete, Press Any Key to return tothe Clear All Operator Totals Screen.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Clear Totals Menu.

(F6) Clear All Hourly Totals

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:1. PRESS [F6]2. View Totals3. PRESS [F8]4. PRESS [F5] and [F8]5. PRESS [F6] and [F8]6. PRESS [F1]7. PRESS Any Key8. PRESS [ESC]

To Clear All Hourly Totals:

1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F6] to select AllHourly Totals.


Totals Menu 4 - 26

2. Before clearing these totals, view the totals for Weightand Price.

3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page and view hours 13 - 24.

4. To view the Totals for Packages and Runs, PRESS [F5].Follow the same steps to view Hours 13 - 24.

5. To view the Totals for Items, PRESS [F6]. Follow thesame steps to view Hours 13 - 24.

6. When ready, PRESS [F1] to select Clear These Totals.

7. When the Clear is complete, Press Any Key to return tothe Clear All Hourly Totals Screen.

8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Clear Totals Menu.


4 - 27 Totals Menu

(F8) Clear All Totals

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:1. PRESS [F8]2. PRESS [F1]3. PRESS [ESC]4. PRESS [ESC]

To Clear All Totals:

1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F8] to select AllTotals.

2. PRESS [F1] to select Clear These Totals. A message willappear telling you that “All totals have now beencleared.”


Totals Menu 4 - 28

3. Press Any Key to return to the Clear Totals Menu.4. PRESS [ESC] again to return to the Totals Menu.

(F3) Void Totals Void Totals allows you to subtract a portion of totals(weight, value, packages or runs) for any Product, Operator,Hour, or Totals Type.

To use Void Totals:



4 - 29 Totals Menu

2. PRESS [F3] to select Void Totals.

To Void Product Totals, continue with Steps 3 - 11 listedbelow.

(F1) Void Product Totals

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F5]4. PRESS [▲] or [▼]5. PRESS [ESC]6. TYPE the Product Number7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]8. TYPE Void Amounts and

PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]9. PRESS [F8]10. TYPE PLU Number or

PRESS [ESC]

3. If not already done, PRESS [F5] to select the Totals Typeyou want to Void.


Totals Menu 4 - 30

4. PRESS [UP ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] tomove the cursor (highlight) through the Totals TypeList.

5. PRESS [ESC] when you have selected the Totals Type.You will be returned to the Void Totals Screen.

6. TYPE the Product Number of the item on which youwant to perform a void.

7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move youto the Weight Void Block.


4 - 31 Totals Menu

8. TYPE the Void Amounts for Weight, Price, Packages,Runs or Items. PRESS [ENTER] to move you from fieldto field.

9. Once you’ve entered the Void Amounts, PRESS [F8] toexecute the Void.

10. After you press Void, the Totals values are updated.You can void another PLU or PRESS [ESC] to return tothe Totals Menu.

(F2) Void Operator Totals

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F2]4. TYPE the Operator ID5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]6. TYPE Void Amounts and

PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]7. PRESS [F8]8. TYPE Operator ID or

PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2].2. From the Totals Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Void Totals.3. PRESS [F2] to select Operator Totals.4. TYPE the Operator ID Number where you want to

perform the void.5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move you

to the Weight Void Block.


Totals Menu 4 - 32

6. TYPE the Void Amounts for Weight, Price, Packages,Runs, or Items. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW(▼)] to move you from field to field.


8. After you press Void, the Totals values are updated. Youcan void another Operator’s Totals or PRESS [ESC] toreturn to the Totals Menu.

(F3) Void Hourly Totals

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F3]4. TYPE Hour Value5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]6. TYPE Void Amounts and

PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]7. PRESS [F8]8. TYPE the Hour Number or

PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2].2. From the Totals Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Void Totals.3. PRESS [F3] to select Hourly Totals.4. TYPE the Hour (0-23) where you want to perform a

void.5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move you

to the Weight Void Block.


4 - 33 Totals Menu

6. TYPE the Void Amounts for Weight, Price, Packages,Runs, or Items. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW(▼)] to move you from field to field.


8. After you press Void, the Totals values are updated. Youcan void another Hour’s Totals or PRESS [ESC] to returnto the Totals Menu.


Totals Menu 4 - 34

(F4) Configure TotalsTypes

From this function, you can complete the following:♦ Create up to seven (7) Total Types♦ Edit Total Types♦ Delete Total Types

The Total Types that you create can be selected from theStart a Run Screen when weighing product(s).

QUICK STEPS


To access Configure Totals Types:


2. PRESS [F4] to select Configure Totals Types.


4 - 35 Totals Menu

(F1) Create a Type

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F4]3. PRESS [F1]4. TYPE Totals Type Name5. PRESS [F4] (If Needed)6. PRESS [F5] (If Needed)7. PRESS [F6] (If Needed)8. If Yes, TYPE Most

Significant UPC Digit9. PRESS [F8] (If Needed)10. PRESS [ESC]

To create a Totals Type:


2. From the Totals Menu, PRESS [F4] to select ConfigureTotals Type.

3. From the Configure Totals Types Screen, PRESS [F1] toselect Create a Type. You should now be on the EditTotals Type Screen.


Totals Menu 4 - 36

4. TYPE the new Totals Type Name.5. PRESS [F4] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals

Type reports to Production Totals (Class # 999999).6. PRESS [F5] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals

Type allows the Operator to change the first UPC digitwhile on the Run Screen.

7. PRESS [F6] to toggle YES/NO on whether this TotalsType should automatically change the leading UPCdigit.

8. If [F6] is set to YES, TYPE [Any Digit 0-9] in the EnterMost Significant UPC Digit Field.

☛ Note

The leading UPC digit can be changed to specify someinternal use for the Bar Code.

9. PRESS [F8] to toggle YES/NO on whether this TotalsType allows the Operator to back-date products. Backdating is used for rewraps. If you select “Yes”, theoperator is prompted to enter the number of days tobackdate the product. The system calculates the shelf lifefrom the backdate.

10. When complete, PRESS [ESC] to save the changes andreturn to the Configure Totals Types Screen.

11. Repeat this procedure until you have entered all yourrequired Totals Types. You can create a total of seven(7) Totals Types.


4 - 37 Totals Menu

(F3) Edit Totals Type

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F4]3. PRESS [▲] or [▼] to select

Totals Type4. PRESS [F3]5. TYPE new Totals Type

Name6. PRESS [F4] (If Needed)7. PRESS [F5] (If Needed)8. PRESS [F6] (If Needed)9. If Yes, TYPE Most

Significant UPC Digit10. PRESS [F8] (If Needed)11. PRESS [ESC]

To Edit This Totals Type:



3. From the Configure Totals Types Screen, PRESS the [UPARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] Key to select theappropriate Totals Type.

4. PRESS [F3] to select Edit This Type. You should now beon the Edit Totals Type Screen.


Totals Menu 4 - 38

5. If required, TYPE the New Totals Type Name.6. PRESS [F4] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals

Type reports to Production Totals (Class # 999999).7. PRESS [F5] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals

Type allows the Operator to change the first UPC digitwhile on the Run Screen.

8. PRESS [F6] to toggle YES/NO on whether this TotalsType should automatically change the leading UPCdigit.

9. If [F6] is set to YES, TYPE [Any Digit 0-9] in the EnterMost Significant UPC Digit Field.

☛ Note

The leading UPC digit can be changed to specify someinternal use for the Bar Code.

10. PRESS [F8] to toggle YES/NO on whether this TotalsType allows the Operator to back-date products. Backdating is used for rewraps. If you select “Yes”, theoperator is prompted to enter the number of days tobackdate the product. The system calculates the shelf lifefrom the backdate.

11. When complete, PRESS [ESC] to save the changes andreturn to the Configure Totals Types Screen.

☛ Note

Production Totals cannot be deleted and its name“Production” cannot be changed. However, otherproperties of configuring “Production” Totals can be edited.


4 - 39 Totals Menu

(F5) Delete Totals Type

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F2]2. PRESS [F4]3. PRESS [▲] or [▼] to select

Totals Type4. PRESS [F5]5. Confirm Selection6. PRESS [F1]

To Delete a Totals Type:



3. From the Configure Totals Types Screen, PRESS the [UPARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] Key to select theappropriate Totals Type.

4. PRESS [F5] to select Delete This Type. A messageappears asking you to confirm that you want to deletethis Totals Type.


Totals Menu 4 - 40

5. To execute the delete, PRESS [F1].

6. Once the delete is complete, you will be returned to theConfigure Totals Types Screen.

(F5) Collect Totals viaMiniNet II

☛ Note

In order to Collect Totals via MiniNet II, the Networkfunction must be configured for MiniNet II. This function isavailable under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.


4 - 41 Totals Menu

QUICK STEPS


To access Collect Totals via MiniNet:


2. PRESS [F5] to select Collect Totals via MiniNet.

3. When you press [F5], the scale searches for each Scale ID(0 to 15) in succession. It continues until all totals arecollected from the scales connected through MiniNet II.

4. If you need to stop the transfer, PRESS [F1] to select StopTransfer.


5 - 1 Print Reports

Chapter Five: Print Reports Menu

♦ Overview♦ Print Reports Menu

• Print Product Totals Menu• Print All Operator Totals• Print Hourly Totals• Print All Totals Reports• Print a Cutting Test Report

♦ Print Products Menu• Print Product List Menu• Print Product Review Menu• Print Time Stamp Changes

♦ Print Flashkeys♦ Print Operator ID List♦ Print Label Related Items Menu

• Print Reusable Text Menu⇒ Print Special Messages Menu⇒ Print Expanded Text Menu⇒ Print Marquee Messages Menu

• Print Label Types• Print Graphics

♦ Print Configuration♦ Print Miscellaneous Menu


Print Reports 5 - 2

Print Reports Menu Flowchart

PRINTREPORTS

MENU

PRESS [F3]Print Reports

Menu

Totals Menu (F1)

ProductTotals Menu

(F1)

All Operator Totals

(F2)

Hourly Totals Menu

(F3)

All Totals Reports

(F4)

Cutting Test (F5)

ProductsMenu

(F2)

Product List Menu (F1)

ProductReview Menu (F2)

Time Stamp Changes

Menu (F3)

Flashkeys (F3)

Operator ID List (F4)

Label Related Items Menu

(F5)

Reusable Text Menu

(F1)

SpecialMessages

Menu (F1)

ExpandedText

Menu (F2)

MarqueeMessages

Menu (F3)

Label Types (F2)

Graphics (F3)

Configuration (F6)

Miscellaneous Menu (F8)

Operator Changes

(F1)


5 - 3 Print Reports

Print Reports MenuSupervisor Menu“F” Key = F3

From this function, you can print:♦ Totals (Product, Operator, Hourly and All Totals)♦ Product Information (Product List, Product Review and

Time Stamp Changes)♦ Flashkeys♦ Operator ID List♦ Label Related Items (Special Messages, Expanded Text,

and/or Marquee Messages, Label Types & Graphics)♦ System Configuration♦ Miscellaneous Reports (Operator Changes) The table below details each Menu function.

Report Description

Totals 1. Allows you to print Product Totals byPLU for a range of items or all items.

2. Allows you to print Hourly Totals for allhours or range of hours.

3. Allows you to print All Operator Totals.

4. Allows you to print All Totals in thesystem.

5. Allows you to print a Cutting Test Report.

Product Information 1. Product List: Allows you to print eachproduct’s information on a label includingname and number. This can be used tomake a Look Up Library for reference.

2. Product Review: Allows you to print eachproduct’s information including UPC BarCode. These can be used as a Scan Test.The UPC Code will include a $1.00 price.

3. Time Stamp Changes: If there arepending Time Stamp Changes, it allowsyou to print (for each PLU changed) thedate and time the change is scheduled totake place.

Flashkeys Allows you to print out what each FlashkeyScreen looks like so you can check to see thatall appropriate entries have been made.

Operator ID List Allows you to print a list of Operator namesand ID numbers.

Label Related Items Allows you to print Reusable Text such asSpecial Messages, Expanded Text, andMarquee Messages with the PLU’s that useeach. It also allows you to print Label Typesand Graphics.

Configuration Allows you to print the system configuration.This report will only print on ContinuousLabel Stock or Listing Paper.

Miscellaneous Reports Allows you to print Operator Changes on alabel; that is the product and operatorinformation for each field change that occursduring a transaction.


Print Reports 5 - 4

QUICK STEPS

From the Start a Run Menu:1. PRESS [SUPER MENU

ON/OFF]2. TYPE Secret ID Number

and PRESS [ENTER] (Ifrequired)

3. PRESS [F3]

To access the Print Reports Menu:

1. From the Start a Run Menu, PRESS [SUPER MENUON/OFF].

2. TYPE your Secret ID Number (if required) and PRESS[ENTER].

3. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3]. You should now beon the Print Reports Menu.

☛ Note

Each menu lists the number of records that are available tobe printed. If a menu has 0 records to print, theaccompanying softkey will be disabled.


5 - 5 Print Reports

(F1) Print ReportsMenu

QUICK STEPS


To access the Print Reports Menu:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select the PrintReports Menu.

2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select theTotals Menu. You should now be on the Print TotalsMenu.

From the Print Totals Menu, you can print:♦ Product Totals♦ Operator Totals♦ Hourly Totals♦ All Totals♦ Cutting Test Report


Print Reports 5 - 6

(F1) Print Product TotalsMenu

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F3]2. PRESS [F1]3. PRESS [F1]4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]5. If [F2], TYPE the beginning



1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select the PrintReports Menu.

2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select theTotals Menu. You should now be on the Print TotalsMenu.

3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F1] to select ProductTotals Menu. You should now be on the Print ProductTotals Menu.


5 - 7 Print Reports

4. To print a report for all product totals, PRESS [F1] toselect Print All.– OR—

5. To print a report for a specified range of items, PRESS[F2] to choose Select a Range.

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning product number.7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the End Printing at Product Number field.8. TYPE the Ending Product Number.9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to

stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Product Totals Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Totals Menu.


Print Reports 5 - 8

(F2) Print All OperatorTotals

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F3]2. PRESS [F1]3. PRESS [F2]

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select PrintReports Menu.

2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select TotalsMenu.

3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F2] to select AllOperator Totals. You should now be on the PrintOperator Totals Screen and the report begins printing.When the report is finished printing, the scale returnsyou to the Print Totals Menu.


5 - 9 Print Reports

(F3) Print Hourly Totals

QUICK STEPS


Hour Number6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]7. TYPE the ending Hour





Print Reports 5 - 10

3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F3] to select HourlyTotals Menu. You should now be on the Print HourlyTotals Menu.

4. To print a report for all hourly totals, PRESS [F1] toselect Print All.– OR—

5. To print a report for a specified range of hours, PRESS[F2] to choose Select a Range.


5 - 11 Print Reports

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning hour number.7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the End Printing at Hour Number field.8. TYPE the Ending Hour Number.9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to

stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Hourly Totals Menu.


(F4) Print All Totals Reports

QUICK STEPS






3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F4] to select AllTotals Reports. You should now be on the Print AllTotals Reports Screen and the report begins printing.

4. If needed, PRESS [F1] to Stop Printing. When the reportis finished printing, the scale returns you to the PrintTotals Menu.



(F5) Print a Cutting TestReport

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F3]2. PRESS [F1]3. PRESS [F5]4. PRESS [▼]5. PRESS [F3]6. TYPE Current Gross

Weight7. PRESS [ENTER]8. PRESS [F3]9. Verify Amounts and

PRESS [F1]10. PRESS [ESC]11. PRESS [ESC]

To print a Cutting Test Report:



3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F5] to select CuttingTest.



4. PRESS [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move the cursor to theTotals Type where the PLU’s for the Cutting Test weresubtotaled.

5. TYPE the Current Gross Weight. (See Note).

☛ Note

Total Gross Weight can be accumulative. Every time youenter a Current Gross Weight, it gets added to the TotalGross Weight. In some cases, you may not want to clear theTotal Gross Weight. If needed, PRESS [F3] to select ClearTotal Gross Weight.



6. PRESS [ENTER] to add the Current Gross Weight to theTotal Gross Weight and move to the Cutting Test TotalsLabel Screen.

7. PRESS [F3] to view the next label. Each time you pressF3, the display shows the Percentage of Gross Weight,Net Weight, Value (Price), and the Number of Packagesfor each PLU, SubClass and Class that was processed.

8. After you verify the amounts on the display, you maywant to print the Cutting Test Report. PRESS [F1] toBegin Printing. If needed, PRESS [F1] to Stop Printing.



☛ Note

The labels print with Percentages for each PLU, SubClassand Class, as well as the Totals for the selected Totals Type.While the labels are printing you will be on the PrintingCutting Test Screen.



9. When printing is complete, the scale returns you to theCutting Test Screen. Notice that the Current GrossWeight was added to the Total Gross Weight.




(F2) Print ProductsMenu

As mentioned previously, the Print Products Menu allowsyou to print on a label:♦ A list of PLU items including name and number♦ Each PLU’s product information including:

* Product Description* Reporting Class* Fixed Weight, Count or Tare Weight* Price and Product Number

♦ Each PLU that has a time stamp change attached to it

QUICK STEPS


To access the Print Products Menu:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F2] to selectProducts Menu. You should now be on the PrintProducts Menu.

☛ Note

The Time Stamp Changes Menu appears if you haveconfigured your scale for IntraNet. The Softkey will bedisabled (grayed) if no Time Stamp Changes are currentlylogged.



The difference between Print Product List and Print ProductReview is that Print Product List prints the UPC Numberwhile Print Product Review prints the actual Bar Code.Other information is the same; however, it may bepositioned differently on the label.

(F1) Print Product ListMenu

QUICK STEPS




To access the Print Product List Menu:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F2] to select PrintProducts Menu. You should now be on the PrintProducts Menu.

3. PRESS [F1] to select Product List Menu.

4. To print a report for all Product Numbers, PRESS [F1] toselect Print All. -- OR--






stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Product List Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Products Menu.

Product List Report



(F2) Print Product ReviewMenu

QUICK STEPS




To access the Print Product Review Menu:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F2] to select PrintProducts Menu. You should now be on the Print ProductsMenu.

3. PRESS [F2] to select Product Review Menu.

4. To print a report for all Product Numbers, PRESS [F1] toselect Print All.-- OR--

5. To print a report for a specified range of ProductNumbers, PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.





stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Product Review Menu.


Product Review Report



(F3) Print Time StampChanges

QUICK STEPS




To access the Time Stamp Changes Menu:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F2] to select PrintProducts Menu. You should now be on the PrintProducts Menu.

3. PRESS [F3] to select Time Stamp Changes Menu.

4. To print a report for all Product Numbers, PRESS [F1] toselect Print All.-- OR--






stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Time Stamp Changes Menu.


Time Stamp Changes Report



(F3) Print Flashkeys

QUICK STEPS


To access and print a Flashkey group:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F3] to selectFlashkeys. You should now be on the Print FlashkeysScreen and the report begins printing. When the reportis finished printing, the scale returns you to the PrintReports Menu.



Flashkey Report

(F4) Print Operator IDList

QUICK STEPS


To access and print the Print Operator ID List:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F4] to selectOperator ID List. You should now be on the PrintOperator ID List Screen and the report begins printing.When the report is finished printing, the scale returnsyou to the Print Reports Menu.



Operator ID List



(F5) Print LabelRelated Items Menu

QUICK STEPS


From the Print Label Related Items Menu, you can select fromthe following options:♦ Reusable Text Menu (To print Special Messages,

Expanded Text or Marquee Messages)♦ Label Types♦ Graphics

To access the Print Label Related Items Menu:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F5] to select PrintLabel Related Items Menu. You should now be on thePrint Label Related Items Menu.



(F1) Print Reusable TextMenu

From this selection you may print the following reports forall product numbers or a specified range of productnumbers:♦ Special Message Reports♦ Expanded Text Reports♦ Marquee Message Reports

(F1) Print Special MessagesMenu

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F3]2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F1]4. PRESS [F1]5. PRESS [F1] or [F2]6. If [F2], TYPE the beginning

Special Message Number7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]8. TYPE the ending Special

Message Number9. PRESS [F1]10. PRESS [ESC]


2. PRESS [F5] to select Label Related Items Menu.

3. PRESS [F1] to select Reusable Text Menu.



4. From the Print Reusable Text Menu, PRESS [F1] to selectSpecial Messages Menu.

5. To print a report for all Special Messages, PRESS [F1] toselect Print All. -- OR--

6. To print a report for a specified range of SpecialMessages, PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.



7. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Special MessageNumber.

8. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move tothe End Printing at Special Message Number field.

9. TYPE the Ending Special Message Number.10. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to

stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Special Messages Menu.

11. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Reusable Text Menu.

Special Messages Report



(F2) Print Expanded TextMenu

QUICK STEPS


Expanded Text Number7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]8. TYPE the ending Expanded

Text Number9. PRESS [F1]10. PRESS [ESC]






4. From the Print Reusable Text Menu, PRESS [F2] to selectExpanded Text Menu.

5. To print a report for all Expanded Text, PRESS [F1] toselect Print All.-- OR--

6. To print a report for a specified range of Expanded Text,PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.



7. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Expanded TextNumber.

8. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move tothe End Printing at Expanded Text Number field.

9. TYPE the Ending Expanded Text Number.10. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to

stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Expanded Text Menu.


Expanded Text Report



(F3) Print Marquee MessagesMenu

QUICK STEPS


Marquee Message Number7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]8. TYPE the ending Marquee

Message Number9. PRESS [F1]10. PRESS [ESC]






4. From the Print Reusable Text Menu, PRESS [F3] to selectMarquee Messages Menu.

5. To print a report for all Marquee Messages, PRESS [F1]to select Print All.-- OR--

6. To print a report for a specified range of MarqueeMessages, PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.



7. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning MarqueeMessage Number.

8. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move tothe End Printing at Marquee Message Number field.

9. TYPE the Ending Marquee Message Number.10. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to

stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Marquee Messages Menu.


Marquee Messages Report



(F2) Print Label Types

QUICK STEPS


Label Type Number6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]7. TYPE the ending Label Type


From this selection you may print the label template for alllabel types or a selected range of label types.

To access and print Label Types:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F5] to select LabelRelated Items Menu.

3. From the Label Related Items Menu, PRESS [F2] to selectLabel Types.



4. To print a report for all Label Types, PRESS [F1] to selectPrint All.-- OR--

5. To print a report for a specified range of Label Types,PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Label TypeNumber.

7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move tothe End Printing at Label Type field.

8. TYPE the Ending Label Type Number.9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to

stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Label Types Menu.



10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Label Related Items Menu.

Labels Type Report

☛ Note

Only Label Types sized to fit on the label stock currentlyloaded will print.

(F3) Print Graphics

QUICK STEPS


Graphics Number6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]7. TYPE the ending Graphics


From this selection you may print all Graphics or a selectedrange of Graphics.

To access and print Graphics:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F5] to select LabelRelated Items Menu.



3. From the Label Related Items Menu, PRESS [F3] to selectGraphics.

4. To print a report for all Graphics, PRESS [F1] to selectPrint All.-- OR--

5. To print a report for a specified range of Graphics,PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.



6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Graphic Number.7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the End Printing at Graphic Number field.8. TYPE the Ending Graphic Number.9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to

stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When thereport is finished printing, the scale returns you to thePrint Graphics Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Label Related Items Menu.

Graphics Report



(F6) PrintConfiguration

QUICK STEPS


To access and print the System Configuration:


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F6] to selectConfiguration. You should now be on the PrintConfiguration Screen. When you press F6, the reportbegins printing. When the report is finished printing,the scale returns you to the Print Reports Menu.



Configuration Report



☛ Note

The Configuration Report will print only on ContinuousLabel Stock or Listing Paper. If any other label stock isloaded, you will get the following message.

(F8) PrintMiscellaneous Menu

QUICK STEPS


To access and print from the Print Miscellaneous Menu (i.e.,Operator Changes):


2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F8] to selectMiscellaneous Menu. You should now be on the PrintMiscellaneous Menu.



3. PRESS [F1] to select Operator Changes. When you pressF1, the Operator Changes report begins printing. Youare on the Print Operator Changes Screen. If needed,PRESS [F1] to Stop Printing. When the report is finishedprinting, the scale returns you to the Print MiscellaneousMenu.

4. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Reports Menu.

Operator Changes Report


6 - 1 Backup/Restore

Chapter Six: Backup/Restore

♦ Overview♦ Backup to Diskette

• Unmark Changed Items♦ Backup Changes to Diskette♦ Restore from Diskette

• Bad Record Scan♦ Add Changes from Diskette♦ Backup or Restore with Intranet

• Send to Scales via Intranet• Send Changes via Intranet


Backup/Restore 6 - 2

Backup/Restore Flowchart

BACKUP/RESTOREMENU

PRESS [F4] Backup/Restore

Menu

Backup to Diskette/Cassette

(F1)

BackupChanges

to Diskette/Cassette

(F2)

Restore from

Diskette/Cassette

(F3)

Add Changes from Diskette/

Cassette (F4)

Send to Scalesvia MiniNet

(F5)

Send Changes via MiniNet

(F6)

Select Data to Transfer

(F7)

PLU Data (F2)

Label Data (F3)

Macros (F4)

Operator Data (F5)

Store Name/Number

(F6)

Scale Configuration

(F7)

Backup Data to Disk in

Ultima 2000 or SP

Format (F8)

Bad Record Scan (F8)



Backup or RestoreSupervisor Menu“F” Key = F4

The Backup/Restore function allows you to Backup orRestore data to/from a cassette or disk, or via ScaleMaster,and/or MiniNet II.

Based on the Data Type(s) selected, you perform either theBackup or Restore function. Data Types include:

Data Type Information Transferred

PLU Data PLU’s, Classes, Special Messages,Expanded Text, NutriFacts Data, andMarquee Messages, Marquee Times,Total Type Names

Label Data Label Types, Fonts, Graphics, and LabelText Names

Flashkeys/Macros Flashkeys and Macros

Operator Data Operator ID’s

Store Name/Number Store Name and Number, Self ServicePrompt

Scale Configuration Configuration, Department IP Addresses

In addition, you can create changes on another QuantumScale and add them to your item file without deleting yourexisting database. You can then transfer the changes toother Quantum Scales in a ScaleMaster, MiniNet II, orIntraNet configuration. Once the changes have beentransferred, you can unmark the changed items to reset thesystem or retain the changes for future transmission. TheUnmark Changed Items option is only available after youexecute the Backup function. A complete explanation of thisfunction is found later in this chapter.

Within this function you can also perform a Bad RecordScan. Bad Record Scan searches the item file database forBad records, ensuring the item file is stable. Any item filethat needs to be checked will be identified and displayed foraction by the operator. Bad Record Scan is only availableafter you execute the Restore function.



☛ Note

The Quantum Scale System is equipped with an IntraNetnetworking system. When you make a change to one scalein a department, it will automatically update all the otherscales attached within that department. A detailedexplanation of the differences between the IntraNet,MiniNet II and ScaleMaster networking options is found inthe Scale Setup section.

☛ Note

The functions available for use on the Backup/RestoreScreen are determined from your selections in the ScaleSetup - Communications Menu.



The following table gives you an overview of the Backupand Restore functions.

Function Description

Backup to Diskette Allows you to Backup your selected datato a diskette via a disk player/recorder.

Backup Changes toDiskette

Allows you to Backup to a diskette anyselected data record marked as a Changedrecord in the database.

Restore from Diskette Allows you to replace all the specifieddata types with new information from thediskette.

Add Changes fromDiskette

Allows you to add for every data typeselected any record marked as a Changedrecord on the diskette.

Send to Scales viaIntraNet

Allows you to send (for every data typeselected) all data to the scales on theIntraNet Network.

Send Changes viaIntraNet

Allows you to send (for every data typeselected) any record marked as changedto the scales on the IntraNet network.

Unmark ChangedItems

Allows you to mark any changed recordas unchanged after data has been sent toother scales or backed-up on a diskette.

Bad Record Scan Allows you to search the database andcheck for records that were not loadedcorrectly after the data has been restored.



☛ Note

The following procedures refer to the Hobart External DiskDrive. If you are using the Hobart Disk Player/Recorder,consult your DPR manual for backup or restore procedures.

You must connect the External Disk Drive to the systemusing the Module Network Port. Be sure the Start a RunScreen displays when you connect the devices.

Backup to Diskette For every data type selected, this function enables you toBackup your data to a disk using a Hobart External DiskDrive. It functions in much the same way as when saving acomputer file to a floppy disk.

☛ Note

In order to Backup to Diskette, the Cassette/Disk functionmust be configured for Disk. This function is availableunder the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

☛ Note

The operator must have the correct Access Level to backupthe database.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F4]2. PRESS [F7]3. PRESS “F” Keys as

appropriate4. PRESS [ESC]5. PRESS [F1]6. Insert the Disk and PRESS

[ENTER] 7. PRESS [F1] - Optional8. PRESS [ESC]

To access Backup to Diskette:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Backup

or Restore Menu.



2. PRESS [F7] to choose Select Data to Transfer.

3. You should now be on the Select Data to Transfer Screen.PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to toggle YES/NO onthe types of data to be transferred.

☛ Note

When writing to a diskette, you need to select the dataformat of SP80/1500 or Ultima 2000.



4. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to theBackup or Restore Menu.

5. PRESS [F1] to select Backup to Diskette.

6. You are now on the Backup to Diskette Screen. Insert thefloppy disk and PRESS [ENTER]. The display will notifyyou when all the data has been transferred.

☛ Note

If the External Disk Drive detects an un-formatted disk, aprompt displays. Select the type of disk you are using.



☛ Note

As you load a disk the system counts down memory usage,“memory free”displays. A Hobart Service Representativeshould be contacted for anything below 100K.

7. (OPTIONAL) You will then have the option to UnmarkChanged Items. If you do not want to Unmark ChangedItems, go immediately to Step 8. To continue withUnmark Changed Items, follow the steps in the UnmarkChanged Items section.

✎ Tip

Important Read This…. Before you select Unmark Changed Items, make sure youhave completed all functions that only require a backup ofchanges. This can save you valuable production time in thelong run.

For example, let’s say you are running a complete backup ofyour database so that it can be sent to another store location.You have completed the Backup to Diskette function andnow you have the option to Unmark Changed Items. If youselect F1, you can no longer only backup your departmentscales with Backup Changes. You now have to read theentire database (for the data type selected) into thedepartment scales. This could take a long time dependingon the size of the data files selected. Select UnmarkChanged Items only when you are completely through withthe Backup functions.

8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Backup or Restore Menu.



Unmark Changed Items

QUICK STEPS

These steps are OPTIONAL:1. PRESS [F1]2. PRESS [ESC]

The Quantum automatically marks a record whenever youmake a change to it. You can then send these changedrecords to other scales via IntraNet or MiniNet II. UnmarkChanged Items allows you to Unmark Changed Items afterthe changes have been sent to the other scales or backed-upon a disk/cassette. Unmark Changed Items will find anyrecord marked as changed and restore them to an unmarkedcondition.

To Unmark Changed Items after a Backup to Cassette/Disk:

1. PRESS [F1] to select Unmark Changed Items. When thescan is complete, the screen will read “Changed itemscan complete.”

2. When the Unmark is complete, PRESS [ESC] to return tothe Backup or Restore Menu.

☛ Note

Unmark Changed Items is only available after the Backupfunction is successfully completed.



Backup Changes toDiskette

For every data type selected, this function is used to Backupany record marked as a changed record in the database to adiskette. You will do this via a Diskette and External DiskDrive. This saves time during the Backup proceduresbecause it only backs up records that have been changed,not the entire database.

You may also use this function when you want to Add aCustom Label. You should choose only Label Data to betransferred when you want to add a custom label.

☛ Note

In order to Backup Changes to Diskette, the Cassette/Diskfunction must be configured for Disk. This function isavailable under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

QUICK STEPS



[ENTER].7. PRESS [F1] - Optional8. PRESS [ESC]

To access Backup Changes to Diskette:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Backup

or Restore Menu.





☛ Note

When writing to a diskette, you need to select the dataformat of SP80/1500 or Ultima 2000.




5. PRESS [F2] to select Backup Changes to Diskette.

6. You are now on the Backup Changes to Diskette Screen.Insert the Disk and PRESS [ENTER]. The display willnotify you when all the data has been transferred.



7. (OPTIONAL) When the data transfer is complete, youmay want to Unmark Changed Items. To UnmarkChanged Items, PRESS [F1]. (For a complete descriptionof this function, refer to the Unmark Changed Itemssection.)

8. If you choose not to Unmark Changed Items or whenUnmark Changed Items is complete, PRESS [ESC] toreturn to the Backup or Restore Menu.



Restore from Diskette For every data type selected, the Restore from Diskettefunction allows you to restore your data to a disk using aHobart External Disk Drive.

☛ Note

In order to Restore from Diskette, the Cassette/Diskfunction must be configured for Disk. This function isavailable under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

Look At This

When you select Restore from Diskette, the function willdelete the database in your scale for the data type(s)selected. It replaces all the specified data type(s) with newinformation from the disk. Make sure you have carefullyselected the correct data type(s).

QUICK STEPS



[ENTER]7. PRESS [F1] - Optional8. PRESS [ESC]

To access Restore from Diskette:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Backupor Restore Menu.








5. PRESS [F3] to select Restore from Diskette.

6. You are now on the Restore from Diskette Screen. Insertthe Disk and PRESS [ENTER]. The display will notifyyou when all the data has been transferred.

7. When the data transfer is complete, you may want to doa Bad Record Scan. If you do not want to perform a BadRecord Scan, go immediately to Step 8. To perform a BadRecord Scan, follow the steps in the Bad Record Scansection.




Bad Record Scan

QUICK STEPS

From the Backup or RestoreMenu:1. PRESS [F1]2. PRESS [ESC]

The Bad Record Scan option is available after you Add orRestore data, or anytime you want to check the databasefrom the Backup or Restore Menu. This function searchesthe time file and checks for records that were not loadedcorrectly. If a record is not linked to anything, it isautomatically deleted.

To run a Bad Record Scan from the Backup or Restore Menu:

1. PRESS [F1] to select Bad Record Scan. The scale will thenbegin running the scan. It could take several seconds orlonger, depending on the amount of data to be checked.There will be a message in the black box at the bottom ofthe screen explaining what problems the scan found, ifany.




Add Changes fromDiskette

For every data type selected, the Add Changes fromDiskette function allows you to add any record marked as achanged record on the diskette to your scale’s database.You will do this via a diskette and the External Disk Drive.

☛ Note

In order to Add Changes from Diskette, the Cassette/Diskfunction must be configured for disk. This function isavailable under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

Look At This

When you select Add Changes from Diskette, you will onlymake changes to your database where the data item isflagged as a changed record. It will not delete anyinformation currently in the database. Make sure you havecarefully selected the correct data type(s).

QUICK STEPS


appropriate4. PRESS [ESC]5. PRESS [F4]6. Insert the disk and PRESS

[ENTER]7. PRESS [F1] - Optional8. PRESS [ESC]

To access Add Changes from Diskette:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select theBackup or Restore Menu.








5. PRESS [F4] to select Add Changes from Diskette.

6. You are now on the Add Changes from Diskette Screen.Insert the Disk and PRESS [ENTER]. The display willnotify you when all the data has been transferred.



7. (OPTIONAL) When the data transfer is complete, youmay want to perform a Bad Record Scan. To perform aBad Record Scan, PRESS [F1]. (For a completedescription of this function, refer to the Bad Record Scansection.)

8. If you choose not to perform a Bad Record Scan or whenthe scan is complete, PRESS [ESC] to return to theBackup or Restore Menu.



Backup or Restorewith Intranet

The Backup or Restore function can also be utilized with theIntraNet Network. Within the IntraNet configuration youcan perform two (2) tasks. You can:♦ Send data to the scales on the Network.♦ Send only changed records to the scales on the Network.

☛ Note

If you have configured the scale for MiniNet, the softkeyswill show Send to Scales via MiniNet or Send Changes viaMiniNet. The steps to complete the data transfer are thesame for MiniNet as they are Intranet.

☛ Note

In order to use Backup or Restore with Intranet, the ScaleSetup -- Network Setup function must be set to Intranet.

Send to Scales via Intranet

QUICK STEPS


appropriate4. PRESS [ESC]5. PRESS [F5]6. PRESS [F1] - Optional7. PRESS [ESC]

The Send to Scales via Intranet option allows you to senddata to the scales on the Network.

To access Send to Scales via Intranet:









5. PRESS [F5] to select Send to Scale via Intranet. Data isimmediately sent to each scale.

6. (OPTIONAL) When the data transfer is complete, youmay want to Unmark Changed Items. To UnmarkChanged Items, PRESS [F1]. (For a complete descriptionof this function, refer to the Unmarked Changed Itemssection.)


Send Changes via Intranet

QUICK STEPS


appropriate4. PRESS [ESC]5. PRESS [F6]6. PRESS [F1] – Optional7. PRESS [ESC]

The Send Changes via Intranet option allows you to sendchanges to other scales if Intranet is installed.To access Send Changes via Intranet:









5. PRESS [F6] to select Send Changes via Intranet. You arenow on the Update Changes via Intranet Screen.

6. (OPTIONAL) When the data transfer is complete, youmay want to Unmark Changed Items. To UnmarkChanged Items, PRESS [F1]. (For a complete descriptionof this function, refer to the Unmarked Changed Itemsection.)



7 - 1 Scale Setup

Chapter Seven: Scale Setup Menu

♦ Overview♦ Creating Operator ID’s

• Operator Log-On Required♦ Flashkeys

• Positioning the Flashkey• Changing Flashkey Height/Width• Creating Flashkeys• Creating a Product-Group Flashkey• View Flashkey Group• Edit Home Flashkey Group• Delete Flashkey• Go to a Flashkey Group• Delete a Flashkey Group• Clear a Flashkey Group• Insert a Flashkey Group• Move a Flashkey Group• Copy a Flashkey Group

♦ Working with Labels• Label Stock Styles

♦ Using the Labels Menu• Select Special Fields to Print on a Label• Label Text Names• Reviewing Available Fields• Label Information• Label Types• Selecting Label Types (Formats)• Standard Labels by Family• Standard Labels by Size• Narrow Labels• Custom Labels• Graphics• Itemized Labels

♦ Scale Operation• Set What Operator Can Modify• Date/Time• Setup Normal Scale Operation

♦ Scale ID & Store Information♦ Communications

• Cassette/Disk• Network

♦ Marquee Setup• Marquee Modes• Creating a Permanent or Daily Message• Timed Marquee Messages


Scale Setup 7 - 2

Scale Setup FlowchartSCALE SET-UP

MENU

PRESS [F5] Scale Set-up

Menu

Operator IDs(F1)

ChangeAnother Operator

(F1)

Delete ThisOperator

(F3)

Edit Operator Name

(F5)

OperatorLogon

Required (F8)

Flashkeys (F2)

Expand Flashkey

Width (F1)

Expand Flashkey

Height (F2)

Reduce Flashkey

Width (F3)

Reduce Flashkey

Height (F4)

Edit Flashkey

(F5)

View Flashkey

Group (F6)

Go ToFlashkey

Group (F7)

More Flashkey Functions

(F8)

Delete Flashkey

(F1)

Edit Home Flashkey

Group (F2)

Delete Flashkey

Group (F3)

Clear Flashkey

Group (F4)

Insert Flashkey

Group (F5)

Move Flashkey

Group (F6)

Copy Flashkey

Group (F7)

Label Menu (F3)

Select Special

Fields to Print on Label

(F1)

Label Text Names

(F2)

Label Information

(F3)

Label Types (F4)

Graphics (F5)

Itemized Labels

(F6)

ScaleOperation

Menu (F4)

Set What Operator

Can Modify(F1)

Date/Time (F2)

Set-up Normal Scale

Operation (F3)

Scale ID & Store

Information (F5)

Communications Menu (F6)

Cassette/Disk (F1)

Network (F2)

Marquee Set-up Menu (F7)

MarqueeModes

(F1)

TimedMarquee

Messages (F2)


7 - 3 Scale Setup

Scale Setup MenuSupervisor Menu“F” Key = F5

From this menu, you can create or edit required scalesystem information such as:♦ Operator ID’s (F1)♦ Flashkeys (F2)♦ Label information (F3)♦ Scale operation items (F4)♦ Scale ID & Store Information (F5)♦ Communications (F6)♦ Marquee Setup (F7)

(F1) Creating OperatorID’s

From this function, you will assign the name, ID numberand access level of each operator. You will also establishwhether you will require the operator to log-on every timehe/she uses the scale. Refer to the Appendix for a list ofFunctions and their related access levels.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F1]3. TYPE Operator ID Number4. PRESS [ENTER]5. PRESS [F1]6. TYPE Access Level Value7. PRESS [ENTER]8. PRESS [F5]9. TYPE Operator Name10. PRESS [ESC]11. PRESS [F1] or [ESC]12. PRESS [F8] - If Needed

To Setup Operator ID’s:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.

2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F1] to selectOperator ID’s.


Scale Setup 7 - 4

3. The cursor should be located at the ID Number field.TYPE the Operator ID Number.

4. PRESS [ENTER] on the Control Panel. If you areentering the Operator ID for the first time, you will geta message window alerting you to the fact that theOperator ID number doesn’t exist.

5. PRESS [F1] to accept the New Operator.

6. TYPE the Access Level for this operator.7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Name field.


7 - 5 Scale Setup

8. Select [F5] to select Edit Operator Name.

9. TYPE the Name of the operator in the Name field.10. PRESS [ESC] to accept the Operator’s Name.

11. Repeat Steps 3 - 10 as required until all Operator ID’shave been entered.

12. If you are finished entering Operator ID’s, PRESS [ESC]to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

Operator Log-on Required

QUICK STEPS

From the Operator ID’s Screen:1. PRESS [F8]2. PRESS [ESC]

After you have finished entering all of the Operator ID’s,you can designate whether Operator’s must enter theirOperator ID before they enter the Start a Run or SupervisorMode.

1. PRESS [F8] to toggle Operator Logon Required to YES orNO.

2. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.


Scale Setup 7 - 6

(F2) Flashkeys Flashkeys are designed to provide a descriptive on-screenlook up of PLU’s, Operator ID’s and/or Macros withouthaving to know the number of the desired item. Theydisplay in a pre-determined format designed by you, andcan have up to 16 flashkeys on each screen. The maximumnumber of flashkeys that can be created is 99,999.

Each screen display of flashkeys is considered a Group andonly one Group is shown on the display screen. Parts ofadjacent Groups cannot be displayed on the screen. You canassign a group to a flashkey, so that when you select theflashkey a different flashkey group displays. This is helpfulin large files, where you may have several types of product.For example, in the deli, you could assign a differentflashkey to each cheese flashkey group, such as imported,colby, swiss, soft, etc.

Flashkey sizes can vary within a Group based on theposition of the upper left hand corner of the flashkey andthe available space around the flashkey. The initial size ofthe flashkey is one unit; however, it can possibly beexpanded up to 4 units wide by 4 units high (a full screen).

The dotted lines in the grid indicate available flashkeypositions in the group. When the flashkey cursor is on aposition that is available, the cursor will appear as a singleunit, bordered with a bold, solid line. When the flashkeycursor is on a position that is occupied by an existingflashkey, the cursor will take on the size and appearance ofthe flashkey (x units wide by y units high). An existingflashkey is indicated by a grayed rectangle with a solid lineborder.


7 - 7 Scale Setup

☛ Note

Be aware that when you access the Setup Flashkey screenfor the first time the default options display. When youPRESS [F8] More flashkey functions, the Additional Optionsdisplay. Remember to verify which option you are selectingwhen you PRESS the F-keys.

Default Options

Additional Options


Scale Setup 7 - 8

Positioning the Flashkey The general format for creating flashkeys is to position theflashkey cursor in the proper grid location where the upperleft hand corner of the flashkey is to be located. This is theorigin of the flashkey. From the origin, the flashkey can beexpanded, space permitting.

☛ Note

Once you have created a flashkey, it cannot be moved. Youwill have to delete it, move the cursor to the new location,and re-type the flashkey information.

Changing FlashkeyHeight/Width

(F1- F4)

QUICK STEPS

From the Setup FlashkeysScreen:1. PRESS [F1]

QUICK STEPS


Softkeys F1 through F4 allow you to make a Flashkey larger(or smaller). Notice that the Softkey is disabled when aparticular function is not possible and enabled when it ispossible. Flashkeys can only be expanded to the right ofand below the origin.

To expand the Width of a Flashkey:

1. PRESS [F1] (and continue pressing until desired size isreached) to increase the flashkey width one unit at atime.

To reduce the Width of a Flashkey:

1. PRESS [F3] (and continue pressing until desired size isreached) to decrease the flashkey width one unit at atime.


7 - 9 Scale Setup

QUICK STEPS


QUICK STEPS


To expand the Height of a Flashkey:

1. PRESS [F2] (and continue pressing until desired size isreached) to increase the flashkey height one unit at atime.

To reduce the Height of a Flashkey:

1. PRESS [F4] (and continue pressing until desired size isreached) to decrease the flashkey height one unit at atime.

☛ Note

The Reduce Flashkey Height and Width Softkey onlybecome enabled once the flashkey height or width is greaterthan one unit.

With the flashkey positioned and sized correctly, you arenow ready to create flashkey information. As alreadymentioned, a flashkey may be created for entering a PLUNumber, Operator ID or Macro.

By default, if a valid PLU, Operator ID or Macro numberexists, the description associated with the record willbecome the text for the flashkey. The flashkey text may thenbe created/edited in the same manner as Special Messages,Expanded Text, etc. The space available for editing the textwill depend on the size of the flashkey. The flashkey textactually appears on the flashkey for selection by theOperator.


Scale Setup 7 - 10

✎ Tip

In order to assist your Operators in quickly serving thecustomer, design your Flashkey Screens to match theproduct layout in your case.

Creating Flashkeys

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F2]3. PRESS Arrow Keys as

appropriate4. PRESS [F5]5. PRESS Arrow Keys as

appropriate6. TYPE the Product Number,

Operator Number orMacro Number

7. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]8. PRESS [F5]9. TYPE the Flashkey

Description10. PRESS [ESC]11. PRESS [ESC]12. PRESS Arrow Keys as

appropriate13. Repeat Steps 3-11 as

needed14. PRESS ESC

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select ScaleSetup Menu.

2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to selectFlashkeys.


7 - 11 Scale Setup

3. You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys Screen.PRESS the appropriate Arrow Key(s) to move to thespace where you want to edit or add a Flashkey.

4. PRESS [F5] to select Edit Flashkey.

5. Now select whether you want the Flashkey to be a PLU,Operator ID, Macro Number or Group Number. PRESSthe appropriate “F” key.

6. TYPE the Product Number, Operator ID, Macro Numberor Group Number in the appropriate field.

7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move tothe Flashkey Description field.


Scale Setup 7 - 12

8. If the record exists, the Description for the recordappears as the default text for the flashkey. TheDescription will be formatted to fit the size of theflashkey. PRESS [F5] to select Edit Flashkey Description(if necessary).

☛ Note

If the Number you entered does not exist, the followingmessage displays.


7 - 13 Scale Setup

9. TYPE the Flashkey Description using the Text Editor orEdit the current Flashkey Description.

10. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes.11. PRESS [ESC] to exit the Edit Flashkey Screen. The

Flashkey Block should now be grayed, letting you knowthat the block has a Flashkey assigned to it.


Scale Setup 7 - 14

12. To add or edit the next Flashkey, PRESS the appropriateArrow Key to move to that Block.

13. Repeat Steps 3-11 as needed until all are added/edited.14. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note

You can have numerous Flashkey Screens designed for eachscale. To move between Flashkey Groups, PRESS the[PREV] and [NEXT] Keys. You can also use the Left andRight Arrow Keys to move from one Flashkey Group to theother. Pressing the Left and Right Arrow Keys moves youone space left or right until you get to the beginning or endof the Flashkey row. When the cursor gets to the end of therow, pressing the Right Arrow Key moves you to thePrevious or Next Flashkey Group. Keep in mind that youcan only view one Flashkey Group at a time.

☛ Note

The following functions are related functions to creatingFlashkeys. This section will detail how the rest of the “F”Keys work while in the Flashkey function.

✎ Tip

To print a Flashkey group, simply move the cursor to thegroup you want to print and PRESS the [PRINT] key.


7 - 15 Scale Setup

Creating a Product-GroupFlashkey

Set up a Product-Group flashkey by assigning a group offlashkeys to an individual flashkey. When the operatorselects the product-group flashkey the flashkey groupassigned to it displays. This is helpful in large files, whereyou may have several products and/or groups of products.The following shows a sample for a deli.

PAGE 1 - Main Deli

PAGE 35 - Cheese

PAGE 36 - Imported Soft Cheeses

You can easily move from Page 1 - Main Deli to Page 35 -Cheeses. We, also, assigned a product-group flashkey toeach cheese group, such as imported and domestic. You caneasily move from Page 35 - Cheeses to Page 36 - ImportedSoft Cheeses. When you complete the transaction, PRESS[ESC] to return to Home Flaskey position.


Scale Setup 7 - 16

(F6) View Flashkey Group

QUICK STEPS

From the Setup FlashkeysScreen:1. PRESS [F6]2. View the Flashkey Group3. PRESS [ESC]4. PRESS [ESC]

This function allows you to take a look at the FlashkeyScreen layout without having to leave the Supervisor Mode.Typically, you would use this as you are creating or editinga Flashkey group.

To View a Flashkey Group:

1. From the Setup Flashkeys Screen, PRESS [F6] to selectView Flashkey Group.

2. View the Flashkey Group.

3. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Setup Flashkeys Screen.4. PRESS [ESC] again to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note

To move between Flashkey Groups in the View mode,PRESS the [PREV] and [NEXT] Keys. When you PRESS[ESC] to return to the Flashkey editor mode, the Flashkeygroup you were viewing will display. For example, if youview group 5, then PRESS [NEXT] to view 6, then PRESS[NEXT] to view 7 and then press [ESC] to return to theFlashkey editor, group 7 will display in the Flashkey editor.


7 - 17 Scale Setup

(F7) Edit Home FlashkeyGroup

For each scale in a department, you can designate a differentHome Flashkey Group. A Home Flashkey Group is the firstscreen of flashkeys that the scale displays when you enterthe Operate mode. For example, you might want each scalein a deli to have a Home Flashkey Group that reflects thepart of the deli case in which the scale is located. This savesyour operator’s time in finding the right flashkey.


QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F2]3. PRESS [F2]4. TYPE Home Flashkey

Group Number5. PRESS [ENTER]6. PRESS [ESC]

2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Flashkeys.You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys Screen.

☛ Note

Be aware of which function you are selecting when youPRESS the F-key. You may need to toggle [F8] More FlashkeyFunctions to access the correct function.

3. PRESS [F2] to select Edit Home Flashkey Group.


Scale Setup 7 - 18

4. TYPE the number of the Flashkey Group you want toassign as the Home Flashkey Group for this scale.

5. PRESS [ENTER] to save the changes.6. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

☛ Note

When you Restore your Scale Configuration (via Cassette,Disk or MiniNet II), the Home Flashkey Group for eachscale may be changed.

(F8) Delete Flashkey

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F2]3. PRESS [PREV] or [NEXT]

as apprpriate4. PRESS the Arrow Keys as

appropriate5. PRESS [F1]

If you no longer carry a certain item in your operation, youmay need to delete a Flashkey. To delete a Flashkey:


2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to selectFlashkeys.

3. You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys Screen. Usethe [PREV] or [NEXT] to move to the Flashkey Groupyou need.

4. Use the ARROW KEYS to move the cursor to theFlashkey you want to delete.

☛ Note



7 - 19 Scale Setup

5. PRESS [F1] to delete the Flashkey. The Flashkey box thatwas erased should now be empty (free of any gray-shading).

6. Repeat Steps 3-5 (as needed).7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

(F7) Go to Flashkey Group

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F2]3. PRESS [F7]4. Enter information in the

prompt

Use Go to flashkey group to access a specific set offlashkeys. This option enables you to go directly to aspecific group without “stepping through” other groups.

To go to a specific flashkey group:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select

Flashkeys.3. PRESS [F7] to select Go to Flashkey Group.


Scale Setup 7 - 20

The Go to flashkey group dialog box displays.

4. Enter the number of the flashkey group that you want togo to.

(F3) Delete a FlashkeyGroup

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F2]3. PRESS [F3]4. Enter information in the

prompt5. PRESS [F8]

If you no longer carry a group of items in your operation,you may need to delete a Flashkey Group.

To delete a flashkey group:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


Flashkeys. You should now be on the Setup FlashkeysScreen.

☛ Note



7 - 21 Scale Setup

3. PRESS [F3] to select Delete Flashkey Group. The Delete aFlashkey Group screen displays.

4. At the Flashkey Group to Delete prompt, enter thenumber of the group you want to delete. The groupnumber that you were displaying defaults as the groupto delete, however you can delete any flashkey group.

5. PRESS [F8] to delete the group.

Look At This

When you delete a group, all following group numberschange. For example, if you delete group 2 the Flashkeysetup that was in group 3 becomes group 2 and so on.

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

The originalsetup.

After deleting theGroup.


Scale Setup 7 - 22

(F4) Clear a FlashkeyGroup

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F2]3. PRESS [F4]4. Enter information in

prompts5. PRESS [F8]

Clear a flashkey group to delete all flashkeys in the group.The groups that follow will not change, but the groupselected will be blank (no flashkeys will exist).

To clear a flashkey group:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale



☛ Note


3. PRESS [F4] to select Clear Flashkey Group. The Clear aFlashkey Group screen displays.


7 - 23 Scale Setup

4. At the Flashkey Group to Clear prompt, enter the numberof the group you want to clear. The group number thatyou were displaying defaults as the group to clear,however you can clear any flashkey group.

5. PRESS [F8] to clear the group.

Look At This

When you clear a group, none of the other Flashkey groupschange.

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

The originalsetup.

After clearingGroup 3.

(F5) Insert a Flashkey Group

QUICK STEPS


prompt5. PRESS [F8]

Insert a flashkey group before any group in the system.

To insert a flashkey group:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Flashkeys.

You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys Screen.3. PRESS [F5] to select Insert Flashkey Group.

☛ Note



Scale Setup 7 - 24

The Insert a Flashkey Group screen displays.

4. At the Insert a flashkey group before flashkey group prompt,enter the number of the group before which you want toinsert another group. The group number that you weredisplaying defaults as the group to insert before, howeveryou can insert a flashkey group anywhere in the sequence.

5. PRESS [F8] to insert the group.

Look At This

When you insert a group, all following group numberschange. For example, if you insert a group before group 3,all flashkey group numbers that follow increase by one, (i.e.3 becomes 4, 4 becomes 5 and so on).

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

The originalsetup.

After insertingthe Group.


7 - 25 Scale Setup

(F6) Move a Flashkey Group

QUICK STEPS



In order to set up your flashkey groups in a logical sequenceor to be more representative of your operation, you maywant to move a flashkey group to another location.

To move a flashkey group:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale



☛ Note


3. PRESS [F6] to select Move Flashkey Group.


Scale Setup 7 - 26

The Move a Flashkey Group screen displays.

The group number that you were displaying defaults asthe group to move, however you can move any flashkeygroup to or from anywhere in the sequence.

4. At the Move Flashkey Group prompt, enter the number ofthe flashkey group you want to move.

5. At the To Flashkey Group prompt, enter the number forthe area in which you want the group moved.

6. PRESS [F8] to move the group.

Look At This

When you move a group all groups between the two groupnumbers change. For example, if you move group 3 togroup 1, the original group 1 becomes group 2 and whatwas group 2 becomes group 3.

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

The originalsetup.

After movingGroup 3 toGroup 1.


7 - 27 Scale Setup

(F7) Copy a Flashkey Group

QUICK STEPS



Once you have set up a Flashkey Group, you may want tocopy it to another area and reuse the information you havealready created. For example, if you have changed the sizesof the flashkeys to resemble your operation, you can copythe same size and format from one flashkey group toanother.

To copy a flashkey group:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale



☛ Note



Scale Setup 7 - 28

3. PRESS [F7] to select Copy Flashkey Group. The Copy aFlashkey Group screen displays.

The group number that you were displaying defaults asthe group number to copy; however, you can copy anyflashkey group to or from anywhere in the sequence.

4. At the Copy Flashkey Group prompt, enter the number ofthe flashkey group that you want to copy.

5. At the To Flashkey Group prompt, enter the number ofthe location to which you want to copy the Flashkeygroup.

6. PRESS [F8] to copy the group.

☛ Note

If you attempt to copy a flashkey group over an existingflashkey group a caution displays.

PRESS [F1] to clear the group before copying.--OR--PRESS [F3] to insert an empty group before the existinggroup and then copy the flashkey setup to the empty group.


7 - 29 Scale Setup

The following illustrates a scenario where the user selects toclear the existing group before copying (copy Flashkeygroup number 4 to group number 2).GROUP

1GROUP

2GROUP

3GROUP

4GROUP

5GROUP

6

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

The originalsetup.

After copyinggroup 4 togroup 2. Noticethat the groupsin between donot change.

The following illustrates a scenario where the user selects toinsert a group, before the existing group, and beforecopying (copy Flashkey group number 4 to groupnumber 2).GROUP

1GROUP

2GROUP

3GROUP

4GROUP

5GROUP

6

GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3

GROUP4

GROUP5

GROUP6

The originalsetup.

After copyinggroup 4 togroup 2. Noticethat the groupsfollowing thegroup copied toincrease by 1.


Scale Setup 7 - 30

Working with LabelsThe Quantum gives you the flexibility to decide what labelsyou will use, if they will be continuous or die cut, and whatwill print on each label.

The following is important information to know aboutlabels and label printing before you get started.

♦ The thermal printhead requires no ink or ribbon.♦ Thermal labels used for transactions may be preprinted

or blank.♦ Preprinted labels may be printed with a customer logo,

store name, store address and/or other merchandisinginformation (in black and white or color).

Labels are available in the following sizes. Some labellengths may require a custom label type.

Label WidthsLabel Lengths Standard

2.25” (57 mm)Standard —

Continuous &Linerless

2.25” (57 mm)

Narrow1.5”(38 mm)

Narrow —Continuous1.5”(38 mm)

1.0” (25 mm) _ _1.5” (38 mm) _ _1.75” (44 mm) _ _2.0” (51 mm) _ _

2.375” (60 mm) _ _2.5” (63 mm) _ _3.0” (76 mm) _ _ _ _3.5” (89 mm) _ _ _ _4.5” (114 mm) _ _5.0” (127 mm) _ _5.5” (140 mm) _ _6.0” (152 mm) _ _8.0” (203 mm) _ _

The following sections explain:♦ Label Stock Styles♦ Labels Menu♦ Label Types (Formats)♦ Graphics


7 - 31 Scale Setup

Label Stock Styles Label stock comes in a variety of sizes as will be describedlater in this section. Each type of stock has its own functionand purpose.

Die Cut Labels Die Cut Labels are cut so that each label is spaced foraccuracy. Because these are all the same size they can bepre-printed to create a more attractive label.

Continuous Label Stock Continuous Label Stock is often used in operations wherenumerous PLU’s are processed and they require differentlabel lengths for printing. By printing on Continuous LabelStock, a PLU with a lot of Expanded Text can be printed, aswell as a PLU with only Special Message information. Itsaves labor, in that you don’t have to change the label rollevery time you need to change PLU’s.

Continuous label stock is also used in itemized receiptformat. An itemized receipt is a label with multiple PLUsand one grand total price and barcode.

Linerless Label Stock Linerless Label Stock is the same as Continuous Label Stock,but does not have a liner.

✎ Tip

Hobart supplied labels are recommended. They are yourbest buy, because:

• Best Quality in the business.* Less than 1/10th of 1% defect rate.* Accurate labels on every roll.

• Single source reliability for all scales.

• Highly resistant to heat and moisture.

• Excellent preprint quality.


Scale Setup 7 - 32

(F3) Using the LabelsMenu

The Labels Menu selection allows you to select and changevarious label default categories, such as:♦ Special Fields to Print on Label♦ Label Text Names♦ Label Information♦ Label Types♦ Graphics♦ Itemized Labels

QUICK STEPS


To select the Labels Menu option:


2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select LabelsMenu.


7 - 33 Scale Setup

(F1) Select Special Fields toPrint on a Label

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F1]4. PRESS “F” Keys as

appropriate5. PRESS [F1]6. PRESS [ESC]7. PRESS [ESC]

To change/edit the Special Fields to Print on a Labelselections:



3. PRESS [F1] on the Labels Menu.

4. You should now be on the Select Special Fields to Print ona Label Screen. PRESS the appropriate “F” key to toggleYES/NO on the fields that you want to print on the label.A YES answer will print the special field if the label typepermits it.

☛ Note

Indented options are available ONLY if the lead optionabove it is set to YES. For example, Julian Sell By is onlyavailable if the Sell By Date is set to Yes.


Scale Setup 7 - 34

5. PRESS [F1] to select Next Page. Continue to toggle thefields as desired. Remember, you can also PRESS [PREV]or [NEXT] to go to the next or previous page of options.

☛ Note

If you PRESS [F5] to select Yes for Weight On By Count, theweight on a by count PLU will print on a custom label whenthe by count value is one.

6. PRESS [ESC] to save your changes and return to theLabels Menu.


(F2) Label Text Names The Label Text Names option allows you to edit the FieldHeader Names that print on labels -- if the Label Type andSetup permit. These include:

♦ Field 1: Packed On♦ Field 2: Best Before♦ Field 3: Sell By♦ Field 4: Net Wt/Ct♦ Field 5: Unit Price♦ Field 6: Total Price♦ Fields 7-20: Used on Custom Labels (i.e. Tare, Operator

Name, Operator ID, Born On, Packed At, Use By, etc.) For all available fields, refer to the section Reviewing AvailableFields. This will give you a complete explanation of the fieldsthat can print on a label.


7 - 35 Scale Setup

QUICK STEPS


appropriate5. TYPE your Changes6. PRESS [ENTER], [▲] or [▼]7. PRESS [ESC]8. PRESS [ESC]

To edit Label Text Names:



3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Label TextNames.

4. You should now be on the Change Text for Labels FieldsScreen. Use the ARROW KEYS to move the box cursor tothe field you want to change (UP moves to the previousfield, DOWN moves to the next field, LEFT and RIGHTmove within the current field).

5. TYPE your change(s) in the designated field.

6. PRESS [ENTER] or the UP or DOWN ARROW Keys tomove to the next field.

7. Once all your changes have been made, PRESS [ESC] tosave your changes and return to the Labels Menu.



Scale Setup 7 - 36

Reviewing Available Fields The following table lists all fields which are available onPrimary and Secondary labels. Although each label type isformatted for specific fields, any field can be selected onCustom Labels. Refer to Selecting Label Types for details onwhich fields print on which labels.

• Barcodes, UPC & EAN13• Best Before• Freeze By• Coupon Expiration Date• Use By• Sell By• Sell Thru• Packed On• By Count• Date• Description• Expanded Text

— Ingredients— Recipes— Cooking Instructions— Health Tips

• Net Weight Statement• Fixed Weight Net Weight Statement

— 3/16” Numbers & Letters— 1/4” Numbers & Letters

• Nutrition Facts• Operator Name• Operator Number• Special Message

— Product Number (PLU)— Merchandising Message— Coupon

• Store ID Number• Store Logo• Store Name

— Store Address— Web Site Address

• Tare• Time• Total Price• Total Type• Unit Price• UPC Number/EAN13 Number• Graphic Art

— User Definable— Embedded

• Safe Handling Graphic— User Definable— Embedded

• Weight


7 - 37 Scale Setup

(F3) Label Information The Label Information option allows you to do thefollowing:• Set the default label types for both the primary and

secondary labels. These default settings appear whenyou create a new product.

• Enable or Disable Auto Wrap expanded text.

Look At This

Be aware that your POS system must accept and understandEAN13 barcodes.

Changing the Default LabelTypes

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F3]4. TYPE new Default Primary

Label Type Number (Ifneeded)

5. TYPE new DefaultSecondary Label TypeNumber (If needed)

6. PRESS [ESC]7. PRESS [ESC]

To change the default label types:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels

Menu.3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Label

Information. The Label Information screen displays.


Scale Setup 7 - 38

4. The Default Primary Label Type number displays on thefirst line -103 is the default. You can change this to anyavailable label type. Refer to Label Types for detailedexamples of all label types.

5. The Default Secondary Label Type number shown on thenext line - 0 is the default. You can change this to anyavailable label type. Refer to Selecting Label Types(Formats) for detailed examples of all label types.

☛ Note

To speed production and add to your merchandisingcapabilities, you have the ability to print a secondary labeleven if you do not have a Secondary Printer attached to thescale system. Basically, you can print a secondary label (forNutrifacts, Graphics, Safe Handling Instructions, etc.) aslong as the label information will print on the label typecurrently loaded into the scale system. If the label size is thewrong one, you will get an error message.

6. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the LabelsMenu.



7 - 39 Scale Setup

Using Word Wrap Use Word Wrap to enable expanded text to automaticallyadjust to fit the width of the field on the label. This featuredoes not effect lines that have a carriage return.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F3]4. PRESS [F8]5. PRESS [ESC]

To use Word Wrap:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup menu.2. PRESS [F3] to select Labels menu.3. PRESS [F3] to select Label Information. The Label

Information screen displays.4. TOGGLE [F8] to set Auto Wrap Expanded Text ON or

OFF.

5. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Labels Menu.


Scale Setup 7 - 40

(F4) Label Types

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F4]4. PRESS [▼] or [NEXT], [▲]

or [PREV] or TYPE theLabel Type Number


Label Types enable you to view available labels containedwithin your scale system. Detailed examples of each areavailable in Selecting Label Types (Formats).

To select the Label Types option:



3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Label Types.

4. You should now be on the Label Types Screen. To moveforward through the available Label Types, PRESS[DOWN ARROW (▼)] or [NEXT]; PRESS [UP ARROW(▲) or [PREV] to move back -- OR -- you can TYPE theLabel Number in the Label Type field.


7 - 41 Scale Setup

☛ Note

The label fields are compressed to fit into the display on theLabel Types screen.

5. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Labels Menu.6. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

✎ Tip

The Label Type Screen displays the Label Type Number andthe label stock size required to print the label shown. If thecurrent label stock is the correct size, you can print the labelshown by pressing [PRINT].

To review all label types in ROM, PRESS [HELP].

Selecting Label Types(Formats)

As discussed previously, Label Types are the actual formatof the label, or how it is set up to print. Refer to the detailedexamples for a better understanding of what the final labelcan look like. You may want to take some time to revieweach example and think about which options you want andwhich label size and format you should use. Although, theseare accurate examples, the size and dimensions of the labelor field may not be exact.

☛ Note

If you do not find the label type you want, you can contactHobart to order a custom label type. Hobart has designed acustom self-contracting label type for continuous label stock.For details and examples, refer to Custom Labels.


Scale Setup 7 - 42

☛ Note

Each label type is set up with default fonts. Changing thefont may add/delete characters per line of text. To aid inmerchandising, the Quantum offers a wide variety of fontsin the system ROM:

Included in the above list are two custom fonts, Hobart 68and Quantum 52. These fonts work in conjunction withspecific custom labels. Contact your local Hobart office formore details.


7 - 43 Scale Setup

Standard Labels by Family Label families were designed to work with the default labeltype settings. For example, you may have label type 26selected (designed for 6.0” labels), but the label stock in thescale is 3.0”. The scale automatically searches the databaseand ROM for the first 3.0” label in the label type 26 family.In this example, the scale prints label type 23. This featureallows the use of nonstandard label lengths.

Although, the following are accurate examples, the size anddimensions of the label or field may not be exact.

☛ Note

Label Types 113 and 123 are identical label formats for theQuantum and the Ultima. They include an embedded SafeHandling graphic which frees the graphic field for the samelabel or a second label.

✎ Tip

Be aware that each label format is limited by the size.Different label sizes in the same family may printsignificantly different information and format.

Family 1

Label Type 11

Label Type 12


Scale Setup 7 - 44

Family 1

Label Type 13

Label Type 14


7 - 45 Scale Setup

Family 1

Label Type 15

Label Type 16


Scale Setup 7 - 46

Family 2

Label Type 21

Label Type 22

Label Type 23

Label Type 24


7 - 47 Scale Setup

Family 2

Label Type 25

Label Type 26


Scale Setup 7 - 48

Family 3(Dual Declaration -Fixed Net Weight)

Label Type 31

Label Type 32

Label Type 33

Label Type 34


7 - 49 Scale Setup

Family 3(Dual Declaration -Fixed Net Weight)

Label Type 35

Label Type 36


Scale Setup 7 - 50

Family 3(Dual Declaration -Fixed Net Weight

Fluid Ounces)

Label Type 31

Label Type 32

Label Type 33

Label Type 34


7 - 51 Scale Setup

Family 3(Dual Declaration -Fixed Net Weight

Fluid Ounces)

Label Type 35

Label Type 36


Scale Setup 7 - 52

Family 5

Label Type 51

Label Type 52

Label Type 53

Label Type 54


7 - 53 Scale Setup

Family 5

Label Type 55

Label Type 56


Scale Setup 7 - 54

Family 6

Label Type 63

Label Type 64


7 - 55 Scale Setup

Family 6

Label Type 65

Label Type 66


Scale Setup 7 - 56

Family 10

Label Type 101

Label Type 102

Label Type 103

Label Type 104


7 - 57 Scale Setup

Family 10

Label Type 105

Label Type 106


Scale Setup 7 - 58

Family 11

Label Type 111

Label Type 112

Label Type 113

Label Type 114


7 - 59 Scale Setup

Family 11

Label Type 115

Label Type 116


Scale Setup 7 - 60

Family 12

Label Type 123

Label Type 125


7 - 61 Scale Setup

Family 12

Label Type 126


Scale Setup 7 - 62

Family 13

Label Type 133

Label Type 134


7 - 63 Scale Setup

Family 13

Label Type 135

Label Type 136


Scale Setup 7 - 64

Standard Labels by Size The following examples represent all standard width labelsaccording to length. Although, the following are accurateexamples, the size and dimensions of the label or field maynot be exact.

☛ Note

Label Types 113 and 123 are identical label formats for theQuantum and the Ultima. They include an embedded SafeHandling graphic which frees the graphic field for the samelabel or a second label.

2.25” Width1.75” Length

Label Type 11Label Type 21

Label Type 31 Label Type 51



7 - 65 Scale Setup






Scale Setup 7 - 66





7 - 67 Scale Setup





Scale Setup 7 - 68



Label Type 179


7 - 69 Scale Setup





Scale Setup 7 - 70





7 - 71 Scale Setup




Scale Setup 7 - 72




7 - 73 Scale Setup




Scale Setup 7 - 74




7 - 75 Scale Setup




Scale Setup 7 - 76




7 - 77 Scale Setup




Scale Setup 7 - 78




7 - 79 Scale Setup




Scale Setup 7 - 80


Label Type 136


7 - 81 Scale Setup

Narrow Labels The following examples represent narrow width labelsaccording to length.


Label Type 200




Label Type 242 Label Type 222 Label Type 232

Label Type 202


Scale Setup 7 - 82


Label Type 223Label Type 233 Label Type 243

Label Type 239

Label Type 189


7 - 83 Scale Setup

Custom Labels Along with the wide variety of standard label types, Hobartoffers custom labels. These labels are designed to fit yourspecific merchandising needs.

One of the options available through custom label types, isthe self-contracting expanded text and/or user graphicfields. When using continuous labels, the expanded textfield contracts according to the amount of expanded text inthe PLU file. This alleviates unnecessary white space. If youare using a custom label type with the self-contracting usergraphic option and you do not assign a graphic, the graphicfield contracts. Refer to the following example.


Scale Setup 7 - 84

(F5) Graphics The Graphics option allows you to view the availableGraphics that can be added to labels. The following graphicsare always available in ROM. (The following graphics arenot shown in actual size.)

Graphic 121

Graphic 123

Graphic 124

☛ Note

Hobart offers a variety of scale graphics through theRetailer’s Scale Merchandising Companion (F-7901). This isa multiple disk set that includes approximately 365 customgraphics. For additional graphics, contact your local HobartRepresentative.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F5]4. PRESS [▼] or [NEXT], [▲]

or [PREV] or TYPE theGraphic Number


To select the Graphics option:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels

Menu.3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Graphics.


7 - 85 Scale Setup

4. You should now be on the Graphics Screen. To movethrough the available Graphics, PRESS [DOWN ARROW(▼)] or [NEXT] to advance; PRESS [UP ARROW (▲)] or[PREV] to move back one graphic at a time -- OR-- youcan TYPE the Graphic Number in the Graphic Numberfield.

5. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Labels Menu.6. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

✎ Tip

If you use standard width label stock, you can print thegraphic by pressing [PRINT].

☛ Note

By pressing [HELP], you can get a list of all the availablesystem graphics. They will be listed by number and name.


Scale Setup 7 - 86

(F6) Itemized Labels Accumulate items mode enables you to print one label or aseries of labels for multiple PLUs. Item Total Labels andItemized Receipts print on any size die cut or continuouslabels.

When configured, you can print a label for each productand/or an Item Total Label for all products. The Item TotalLabel contains only the grand total and barcode. Refer to thefollowing examples.


7 - 87 Scale Setup

When configured you can print an Itemized receipt for allproducts entered. This receipt contains all products, a grandtotal and a barcode. Refer to the following examples.

Itemized Receipt (2.25” X 3.0”)

Itemized Receipt(1.5” X 5.0”)

Itemized Receipt(Continuous X 2.25”)

☛ Note

The following table lists the available range for itemizedreceipts on die cut labels.

Standard Size Range Narrow Size Range2.375 1 - 2 3.0 1 - 43.0 1 - 4 3.5 1 - 54.5 1 - 6 5 1 - 96 1 - 8 Continuous 1 - 1008 1 - 12Continuous 1 - 100


Scale Setup 7 - 88

Selecting Item Tickets

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F6]4. PRESS [F3] to select NO5. PRESS [F4] - As needed6. PRESS [F5] - As needed

TYPE UPC Number - Asneeded


To select Item Tickets as the printing option:



3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F6] to select ItemizedLabels.

4. You should now be on the Itemized Labels Screen.Toggle [F3] Print an Itemized Receipt to NO. The Print aTotal Label Only prompt displays.


7 - 89 Scale Setup

5. Toggle [F4] Print a Total Label Only to either YES or NO.a. If you select YES to Print the Item Total label Only

and not the preceding Item Tickets, enter the UPC orEAN number to print on the total label.--OR--

a. If you select NO to Print a Total Label Only ItemTickets and the Item Total label will print. The Printa Bar Code on Individual Labels prompt displays.

b. PRESS [F5] to select YES/NO.c. If you select YES, ENTER the UPC or EAN Number

in the UPC/EAN Number to Print on the TotalLabel.




Scale Setup 7 - 90

Selecting Itemized Receipts

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F6]4. PRESS [F3] to select YES5. Enter the UPC/EAN

number6. PRESS [ESC]7. PRESS [ESC]

To select Itemized Receipts as the Accumulate Itemsprinting option:



3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F6] to select ItemizedLabels.

4. You should now be on the Itemized Labels Screen. PRESS[F3] Print an Itemized Receipt to select YES.

5. Enter the UPC/EAN number to print on the label.




7 - 91 Scale Setup

(F4) Scale Operation The Scale Operation option allows you to:♦ Select the field(s) that the operator can override.♦ Change the Date, Time or Date Format.♦ Set the basic values controlling how the scale operates.

QUICK STEPS


To select Scale Operation:

1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale SetupMenu.

2. On the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F4] to select ScaleOperation. You should now be on the Scale OperationMenu.


Scale Setup 7 - 92

(F1) Set What the OperatorCan Modify

QUICK STEPS


appropriate5. PRESS [F1] or [NEXT]6. PRESS “F” Keys as

appropriate7. PRESS [ESC]8. PRESS [ESC]

From this screen, you can designate what field(s) theoperator can temporarily override when they are weighingand labeling packages in the Operator Mode Run Screen.

To select the Set What the Operator Can Modify option:


2. On the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F4] to select ScaleOperation.

3. You should now be on the Scale Operation Menu. PRESS[F1] to select Set What the Operator Can Modify.

4. Use the “F” keys to toggle the YES/NO settings on thefollowing operational fields:

♦ Date/Time♦ Price♦ By Count♦ Tare


7 - 93 Scale Setup

5. PRESS [F1] or [NEXT] to move to the Next Page. Youcan also PRESS [PREV] to move back a screen.

6. Use the “F” keys to toggle the YES/NO settings on thefollowing operational fields:

♦ Shelf Life♦ Label Type♦ Fixed Weight♦ Product Life♦ Portions

7. When finished, PRESS [ESC] to return to the ScaleOperation Menu.


☛ Note

If the Operator is working with Miscellaneous PLU’s, theywill be able to change all fields for that PLU, regardless ofhow these settings are configured.


Scale Setup 7 - 94

(F2) Date/Time

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F4]3. PRESS [F2]4. PRESS [F1]5. TYPE new Date6. PRESS [F2]7. TYPE new Time8. PRESS [F3] - As needed9. PRESS [F5], [F6], [F7], or

[F8]10. PRESS [ESC]11. PRESS [ESC]

From this screen, you can change the date and time; as wellas select the format that the date will print on the label.

To select Date/Time:1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale Setup

Menu.2. On the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Scale

Operation. You should now be on the Scale OperationMenu.

3. PRESS [F2] to select Date/Time.

4. To Change the Date, PRESS [F1].5. TYPE the new date.6. To Change the Time, PRESS [F2].7. TYPE the new time.8. While changing the time, PRESS [F3] to change AM/PM

(if needed).9. To select the date format, PRESS [F5-F8] to choose the

format you prefer for printing. The date must be enteredin the order of the selected date format.

10. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return you to theScale Operation Menu.



7 - 95 Scale Setup

(F3) Setup Normal ScaleOperation

The Setup Normal Scale Operation option allows you tospecify the following details:♦ Display Weight During Flashkey Screen (Yes/No)♦ Collect Product Totals (Yes/No)♦ Collect Hourly Totals (Yes/No)♦ Collect Operator Totals (Yes/No)♦ Sound a Beep on Stable Weight (Yes/No)♦ Use ‘Product Life’ as ‘Frozen Shelf Life’♦ Fixed Weight Units (Whole Ounces, 1/10th of a Ounce)♦ By Count Calculation Method (1, 2, or 3)♦ Auto Look-Up of Product (Yes/No)♦ No. of Digits to Begin Auto Look-Up (2-6)♦ Beeper Volume (F7 = Increase; F8 = Decrease)♦ Select the Weigh Types to be displayed on the Start a

Run Screen

☛ Note

♦ Auto Look-Up allows you to set the number of digitsrequired for the system to automatically look-upproduct information. Values can range from 2-6 digits.

♦ By Count (values of 1, 2 or 3) determines how the ByCount is calculated.

The By Count Calculation Method determines which ofthree (3) formulas is used to calculate the Total Price for ByCount items when less than the By Count quantity is sold.The following describes what selecting 1, 2 or 3 means.

Calculation Method Description

One (1) If the discount is greater than $.01, thecustomer starts receiving the discount(.01 per item) sooner than on the lastitem purchased to complete the deal.

Example: Deal = 3/$1.00Customer is charged .34 for the firstitem, .33 for the second, and .33 forthe third.


Scale Setup 7 - 96

Calculation Method Description

Two (2) The customer receives the discounton the last item purchased to“complete the deal.” The By CountPrice is divided by the By CountQuantity and the answer is roundedup to the next cent; the answer ismultiplied by the Quantity sold. Ifthe By Count quantity is sold, thebargain differential is subtracted so asnot to exceed the By Count Price.

By Count Price x Quantity = TotalBy Count Quantity Sold Price

Three (3) In this formula, the division isperformed last and the answer iscarried to three decimals; any fractionis then rounded up to the next cent.

By Count x Quantity Sold = Total Price By Count Quantity Price

The following table gives you a comparison for thefollowing example: By Count Quantity = 12, By Count Price= $2.09.

Method 1 Method 2 Method 31 .18 .18 .182 .36 .36 .35*3 .54 .54 .534 .72 .72 .70*5 .90 .90 .886 1.07 * 1.08 1.05*7 1.24 * 1.26 1.22*8 1.41 * 1.44 1.409 1.58 * 1.62 1.57*10 1.75 * 1.80 1.7511 1.92 * 1.98 1.92*12 2.09 * 2.09* 2.09*

* Denotes that the discount was applied.

☛ Note

Reminder: If you entered an Exception Price, it takesprecedence over the By Count Calculation Method you selected.

In the example, 3/$1.00, Exception Price = .50, the customerpays .50 for the 1st item; .50 for second and .00 for third.


7 - 97 Scale Setup

QUICK STEPS


appropriate5. PRESS (F8) as appropriate6. PRESS [F1]7. PRESS “F” Keys as

appropriate8. PRESS [F1]9. PRESS “F” Keys as

appropriate10. PRESS [ESC]11. PRESS [ESC]

To select the Setup Normal Scale Operation option:


2. On the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F4] to select ScaleOperation. You should now be on the Scale OperationMenu.

3. PRESS [F3] to select Setup Normal Scale Operation.

4. You should now be on the Setup Normal Scale OperationMenu. PRESS the “F” keys to answer YES/NO to selectthe option, toggle numeric answers or adjust the setting.


Scale Setup 7 - 98

☛ Note

If you toggle [F2] Display Weight During Flashkey Screen toYES, the weight displays, as follows:

You can return to the flashkey screen by pressing [ENTER]or pressing [ESC] to remove the weight box.

5. PRESS [F8] to toggle between Whole Ounces and OneTenth of an Ounce. This affects how the Fixed Weight isdisplayed in the Operate Mode.

6. PRESS [F1] or [NEXT] to move to the Next Page (Page 2of 3), or PRESS [PREV] to move back one page.

7. PRESS the “F” keys to answer YES/NO to select theoption, toggle numeric answers or adjust the setting.


7 - 99 Scale Setup

8. PRESS [F1] or [NEXT] to move to the Next Page (Page 3of 3), or PRESS [PREV] to move back one page.

9. From this screen, PRESS the appropriate “F” Key totoggle Display/Don’t Display to select which WeighTypes will be listed on the Start a Run Screen. Only thetypes selected as “Display” will appear in the list.

10. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the ScaleOperation Menu.



Scale Setup 7 - 100

(F5) Scale ID & StoreInformation

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F5]3. TYPE the Scale ID Number4. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]5. TYPE Store ID Number6. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]7. TYPE the Store Graphic

Number8. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]9. PRESS [F5]10. TYPE the Store Name11. PRESS [ESC]12. PRESS [ESC]13. PRESS [ESC]

The Scale ID & Store Information option allows you toassign the Store Number, Scale ID, Store Graphic and StoreName to your Quantum Scale System.

To access this option:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.

2. PRESS [F5] from the Scale Setup Menu to select Scale ID& Store Information.

3. You should now be on the Scale ID & Store InformationScreen. TYPE the Scale ID Number in the appropriatefield.

☛ Note

Valid Scale ID numbers are as follows:

• If IntraNet is NOT turned on, Scale ID’s can benumbered 0 - 99.

• If IntraNet is turned on, Scale ID’s should be 0 - 15. Therecommended Server Scale ID Number is 15.


7 - 101 Scale Setup

4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move tothe next field.

5. TYPE the Store ID Number in the appropriate field.6. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the next field.7. TYPE the Store Graphic Number in the appropriate

field.8. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the next field.9. To enter the Store Name, PRESS [F5] to select Edit Store

Name.

10. TYPE the Store Name in the Store Name box.

11. PRESS [ESC] to save the Store Name changes.12. When all changes have been made, PRESS [ESC] to

return to the Scale Setup Menu.13. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.


Scale Setup 7 - 102

(F6) Communications

QUICK STEPS


appropriate

From this screen, you can:♦ Select the device to Backup and Restore scale

information• Disk• Cassette

♦ Select the network to which your scale is connected (ifany)

• None• MiniNet II• ScaleMaster• IntraNet

To access the Communications Menu:


2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F6] to select theCommunications Menu option.


7 - 103 Scale Setup

3. You should now be at the Communications Menu. PRESSthe appropriate “F” Key to choose Cassette/Disk orNetwork.

(F1) Cassette/Disk

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F1]4. PRESS [F2]5. PRESS “F” Keys as

appropriate6. PRESS [ESC]7. PRESS [ESC]8. PRESS [ESC]

To select the Cassette/Disk option:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


Communications Menu.3. You should now be at the Communications Menu. PRESS

[F1] to select Cassette/Disk. You may now accept thedefault settings or change the settings.

Look At This

If you change any of the displayed values, communicationsmay be inhibited.

☛ Note

Changes to the Recorder Type will automatically change thedefault settings for Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits and Stop Bits.


Scale Setup 7 - 104

Default Settings for Cassette

4. PRESS [F2] to toggle between Cassette or Disk.5. PRESS “F” Keys as appropriate to change the settings.6. PRESS [ESC] when your choice of Cassette or Disk and

their settings are displayed.

Default Settings for Disk

7. When the settings are correct, PRESS [ESC] again toreturn to the Communications Menu.

8. PRESS [ESC] again to return to the Scale Setup Menu.


7 - 105 Scale Setup

(F2) Network

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F2]4. PRESS [F2]5. PRESS “F” Keys as

appropriate6. PRESS [ESC]7. PRESS [ESC]8. PRESS [ESC]

To accept or change the Network type:


2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F6] to selectCommunications Menu.

3. You should now be at the Communications Menu. PRESS[F2] to select Network. You may now accept the defaultsettings or change the settings.

Look At This

If you change any of the displayed values, communicationsmay be inhibited.

☛ Note

Changes to the Network Type will automatically change thedefault settings for Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits and StopBits.


Scale Setup 7 - 106

Network Type = None

4. PRESS [F2] to select the Network Type.5. PRESS “F” Keys as appropriate to change the settings.6. PRESS [ESC] when your choice of Network Type and

the settings are displayed.

Network Type = MiniNet II

Network Type = ScaleMaster


7 - 107 Scale Setup

Network Type = IntraNet

☛ Note

If you have installed the optional RS-485 board, the IntraNetscreen will look different. Pressing [F3] will allow you tosetup both the ScaleMaster and Client/Server sides.

7. When the settings are correct, PRESS [ESC] again toreturn to the Communications Menu.

8. PRESS [ESC] again to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

(F7) Marquee Setup

QUICK STEPS


Marquee Setup is used to:♦ Set the basic values controlling how the marquee

operates♦ Schedule times for displaying marquee messages when

the scale is idle

To access Marquee Setup:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select the Scale

Setup Menu.


Scale Setup 7 - 108

2. PRESS [F7] to select Marquee Setup Menu.

(F1) Marquee Modes The Marquee Modes function is used to set up the displayfor :♦ Messages related to a product♦ Description of a product♦ Generic messages used during idle scale time♦ Timed Messages

The following table provides you a definition of eachMarquee Mode item.

Mode Description

Permanent Message A Permanent Message is a marqueemessage that does not change very often.If other messages are also created, theywill display in sequence of priority.

♦ Example: Welcome to {Our Store}!

Daily Message A Daily Message alternates with thePermanent Message. In sequence ofpriority, it displays as long as there areno Product Descriptions, ProductMarquee Messages to be displayed orTimed Messages scheduled.

♦ Example: Happy New Year !!

Timed MarqueeMessages

This option allows you to turn On or Off,the option to display Timed MarqueeMessages. Timed Marquee Messagesreplace Daily Messages in the sequenceof priority.

♦ Example: “Pork Roast Special$2.99/lb.” at 3:00 pm and “CornedBeef $2.19/lb.” at 4:00 pm


7 - 109 Scale Setup

Continued... Mode Description

Product MarqueeMessages

If you have created Marquee Messagesfor your products, this option allows youto designate whether you want theProduct Marquee Message to displaywhen the operator enters the PLUnumber. In the sequence of priority,Product Marquee Messages replaceseither Timed Messages or DailyMessages. Product Description willdisplay before the PLU MarqueeMessage, unless it is set to be displayedContinuously.

♦ Example: Chicken Wings go greatwith Potato Salad!

Display ProductDescription

This option allows you can designatewhether you want to display the ProductDescription and if so, how often youwant to display it. The ProductDescription will display before thePermanent Message, Product MarqueeMessage or the Daily or TimedMessages.

♦ Example: Chicken Wings

☛ Note

Prior to setting up your display options for the Permanentand Daily Marquee Messages, you need to create themessages in the Change Product function. In order to dothis, you will need to create a PLU that exists for theMarquee Messages only. Make sure you use a PLU Numberthat falls outside your normal range of PLU Numbers andClasses.


Scale Setup 7 - 110

Creating a Permanent orDaily Message

To create a Permanent or Daily Message:

1. PRESS [F1] to select Change Product.2. TYPE the Product Number.3. PRESS [F1] to select Add as New Product.4. PRESS [F1], [F2] or [F3] to select the PLU Type. For this

function, the PLU Type really doesn’t matter.5. PRESS [PREV] to go to Page 3.6. PRESS [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to the Marquee

Messages field.7. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field.8. PRESS [F1] to select Create New.9. TYPE the Marquee Message, using the Marquee Editor

as needed.10. PRESS [ESC] to return to Page 1 of the Change Product

Screen.11. Make a note of the PLU Number you entered for the

Marquee Message(s).

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F7]3. PRESS [F1]Options:4. TYPE the Permanent

Message Number5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]6. TYPE the Daily Message

Number7. PRESS [F3] - As needed8. PRESS [F5] - As needed9. PRESS [F6] - As needed10. If “x no. of times”

displayed, TYPE Numberof Times Value.

11. PRESS [F8] / PRESS [F8]12. PRESS [ESC]13. PRESS [ESC]14. PRESS [ESC]

To access the Marquee Modes Screen:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select the ScaleSetup Menu.


7 - 111 Scale Setup

2. PRESS [F7] to select Marquee Setup Menu.

3. From the Marquee Setup Menu, PRESS [F1] to selectMarquee Modes.

Options :4. TYPE the Product Number that contains the Permanent

Message in the appropriate field.5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move the

cursor to the Daily Message field.6. TYPE the Product Number that contains the Daily

Message.7. PRESS [F3] to toggle between Display or Don’t Display

Timed Marquee Messages.


Scale Setup 7 - 112

8. PRESS [F5] to toggle between Display or Don’t DisplayProduct Marquee Messages.

9. PRESS [F6] to toggle between Continuously, x Numberof Times or Never for Display Product Descriptionoption.

10. If you select “x number of times”, TYPE the Value in theDisplay the Description how many times (1-14) field.

11. To View the Selected Message, PRESS [F8]. The messagewill display on the bottom of the Marquee Modes Screen.If needed, PRESS [F8] to Stop the Selected Message.


7 - 113 Scale Setup

12. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Marquee Setup Menu.13. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.14. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note

If you designate Display Product Description to runContinuously, the Product Marquee Display will not display-- even if the toggle is set to Display. Notice the Softkey isdisabled when Description is displayed Continuously.

(F2) Timed MarqueeMessages

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F7]3. PRESS [F2]4. PRESS [F2]5. TYPE the Time6. PRESS [F3]7. PRESS [ENTER]8. TYPE the Product Number9. PRESS [ENTER]10. PRESS [F8] / PRESS [F8]11. PRESS [ESC]12. PRESS [ESC]13. PRESS [ESC]

In order to use this function, you must have at least one (1)PLU with a marquee message created for it. A completedescription of how to Create Marquee Messages is found inthe Change Product section of this manual.

To access Timed Marquee Messages:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select the ScaleSetup Menu.

2. PRESS [F7] to select Marquee Setup.3. You should now be on the Marquee Setup Menu. PRESS

[F2] to select Timed Marquee Messages.


Scale Setup 7 - 114

4. You should now be on the Timed Marquee MessagesScreen. PRESS [F2] to select Create a Timed Message.

5. In the Display Time field, TYPE the time you want themessage to display.

6. PRESS [F3] to change AM/PM as needed.7. PRESS [ENTER] to move the cursor to the Product

Number field.8. TYPE the desired Product Number.9. PRESS [ENTER] on the Control Panel to save the

changes.


7 - 115 Scale Setup

10. To review the message, PRESS [F8]. The display showsthe message that is on the same line as the cursor in atext box at the bottom of the screen. If needed, PRESS[F8] again to select Stop Selected Message.

11. Repeat Steps 4 - 9 to setup other Timed Messages.12. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Marquee Setup Menu.13. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.14. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note

Each time you enter this function, the Timed Messages arelisted in the order in which they will display. However, ifyou create a message out of sequence, you can selectReorder List by Time to arrange them by time of display.

1. PRESS [F1] to Reorder List By Time. The list of timedMarquee Messages is rearranged by the Display time.


8 - 1 Miscellaneous Menu

Chapter Eight: Miscellaneous Menu♦ Overview♦ Delete Time Stamp Changes♦ Information Tracker

• Network Report• Operator Changes

♦ Return to Operate Mode


Miscellaneous Menu 8 - 2

Miscellaneous Menu Flowchart

MISCELLANEOUSMENU

PRESS [F6]Miscellaneous Menu

InformationTracker Menu

(F8)

Network Report (F1)

Operator Changes (F2)

Delete All Changes

(F1)

Delete This Change

(F2)



Miscellaneous MenuSupervisor Menu“F” Key = F6

From this menu, you can complete the following:♦ Delete Time Stamp Changes (If IntraNet is configured)♦ View and Delete Information Tracker Data including a

Network Report (If IntraNet is configured) and OperatorChanges

(F1) Delete TimeStamp Changes

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F6]2. PRESS [F1]3. PRESS [F7]4. Press Any Key5. PRESS ESC

If you have configured your scale with IntraNet, you can setyour scale to transmit data changes at a predetermined time.However, if you later decide that you do not want the TimeStamp Changes to occur, you can delete them.

To access the Delete Time Stamp Changes:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F6] to selectMiscellaneous Menu.

2. PRESS [F1] to select Delete Time Stamp Changes.




When you press [F7], the Time Stamp Changes are deletedand you get a message informing you that the deletionoccurred.

4. Press Any Key to return to the Miscellaneous Menu.5. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.



(F8) InformationTracker

QUICK STEPS


Information Tracker provides you information on IntraNetcommunication errors and Operator Changes made toPLU’s during the Operate Mode. It contains the followingmenu selections:♦ Network Report (F1) {If IntraNet is ON}♦ Operator Changes (F2)

To access the Information Tracker Menu:


2. PRESS [F8] to select Information Tracker Menu.



(F1) Network Report

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F6]2. PRESS [F8]3. PRESS [F1]4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]5. PRESS [ESC]6. PRESS [ESC]7. PRESS [ESC]

Network Report provides you a list of communicationerrors that occur during IntraNet Communications. Fromthis screen, you can view, print or delete individualcommunication errors.

To access Network Report:


2. From the Miscellaneous Menu, PRESS [F8] to selectInformation Tracker Menu.



3. You should now be on the Information Tracker Menu.PRESS [F1] to select Network Report. The display givesyou a list of communications errors that occurred duringIntraNet Communications.

4. Use [UP ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] tomove through the list one error at a time. If necessary,use [PREV] or [NEXT] to move view the report a page ata time.

5. PRESS [F1] to remove all the errors displayed -- OR --PRESS [F2] to remove the highlighted error only.

6. When you have finished, PRESS [ESC] to return to theInformation Tracker Menu.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Miscellaneous Menu.8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.



(F2) Operator Changes

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F6]2. PRESS [F8]3. PRESS [F2]4. Use [▲] or [▼] -- OR --

[PREV] or [NEXT]5. PRESS [F1] or [F2]6. PRESS [ESC]7. PRESS [ESC]8. PRESS [ESC]

Operator Changes allows you to view and/or deletechanges that each operator made to a PLU during theOperate Mode. It allows you to print and/or delete eachchange individually or all of them at one time.


2. From the Miscellaneous Menu, PRESS [F8] to selectInformation Tracker. You should now be on theInformation Tracker Menu.

3. PRESS [F2] to select Operator Changes. The displayshows all the changes made by your Operators, with themost recent changes listed first. It will display theOperator that made the changes, if known.

4. Use [UP ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] tomove through the list one error at a time. If necessary,use [PREV] or [NEXT] to move view the report a page ata time.

5. PRESS [F1] to remove all the changes displayed --OR--PRESS [F2] to remove the highlighted change only.



6. When you have finished, PRESS [ESC] to return to theInformation Tracker Menu.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Miscellaneous Menu.8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

(F8) Return to OperateMode

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F8] or [ESC]

Return to Operate Mode quickly sends you back to the Starta Run Screen.

To return to the Operate Mode from the Supervisor Menu:

1. PRESS [F8] to select Return to Operate Mode --OR--2. PRESS [ESC] on the Control Panel.


9 - 1 Self Service

Chapter Nine: Self Service

♦ Overview♦ Using the Keyboard and Self Service Keypad♦ Configuring Self Service

• Setting the Date and Time• Setting the Default Label Type• Setting Up Security/Operator IDs• Setting Up Auto Lookup• Setting Up Self Service• Setting Up the Consumer Default Merchandising Screen• Zeroing the Scale

♦ Using the Self Service Produce Keypad• Setting Up Speedkeys• Deleting Speedkeys


Self Service 9 - 2

Look At This

Be aware that this section redefines tasks, which aredescribed in early chapters. Procedures in this section arewritten specifically for the Self Service Quantum. They maybe slightly different then described in previous chapters.

Self Service Self Service enables your consumers to use the scale withminimal store employee involvement. Once the scale is setup the consumer can enter the CODE number, weigh theitem and print a label.

Self Service scales vary slightly from most Quantum scales.They are sold individually or as part of a HobartWeighStation. The WeighStation includes:• a Self Service Scale - equipped with an interactive

display and keyboard; platter rails (optional)• a Scale Stand• a PLU Code Plexiglas Display/Holder (11X17)• a Brochure• a Brochure Holder• a Poster• Produce Keypad (optional)


9 - 3 Self Service

Using the Keyboardand Self ServiceKeypad

Because the self service keypad has limited keys (enablingquicker and easier use by the consumer), you must use anXT keyboard to access and work in Supervisor mode.

The scale is equipped with a serial port that enables you touse a keyboard for setting up and editing the system. TheKeyboard plug-in is located on the left side of the unit.

The keyboard should be plugged in when the scale displaysthe Start a Run Screen. To access the Start a Run Screen,press the Reset button.

From this point all Supervisor functions are accessible usingthe XT keyboard. Keys [F1] - [F8] are valid on the keyboard,however, you can not see a key designation. The top box onthe Screen is [F1] going down to [F8].

The [F10] key accesses the Supervisor Menu, [F11] accessesthe Operate Macros Screen and [F12] accesses Help.

Configuring SelfService

Set up Self Service to allow consumers to use the scalewithout employee involvement. The Hobart recommendedconfiguration for Self Service includes the following:♦ Setting the Date and Time♦ Setting the Default Label Types♦ Setting Up Security/Operator IDs♦ Setting Up Auto Look-up (4 and 5 digit)♦ Setting Up Self Service♦ Setting Up the Consumer Default Merchandising Screen♦ Zeroing the Scale

☛ Note

Any random weight or by count product can be accessed.


Self Service 9 - 4

Setting the Date and Time

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F10]2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F4]4. PRESS [F2]5. PRESS [F1] & TYPE new

Date6. PRESS [F2] & TYPE new

Time7. PRESS [ESC]8. PRESS [ESC]

From this screen, you can change the date and time; as wellas select the format that the date will print on the label.

To set the Date/Time:

1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] to access theSupervisor Menu.


3. PRESS [F4] to select Scale Operation. You should now beon the Scale Operation Menu.

4. PRESS [F2] to select Date/Time.

5. To Change the Date, PRESS [F1]. TYPE the new date.The date must be entered in the order of the selecteddate format.

6. To Change the Time, PRESS [F2]. TYPE the new time. Ifneeded, PRESS [F3] to change AM/PM.

☛ Note

If applicable, PRESS [F5-F8] to select the date format youprefer for printing.


9 - 5 Self Service

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return you to theScale Operation Menu.


Setting the Default LabelType

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F10]2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F3]4. PRESS [F3]5. ENTER primary label type6. ENTER 07. PRESS [ESC]

Enter the appropriate label type in the primary label typefield. You should also, set the default secondary label typeto zero (0), so that the scale only prints one label.

To set the default secondary label type:

1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] to access theSupervisor Menu.


3. PRESS [F3] to select Labels Menu.4. PRESS [F3] to select Label Information.


Self Service 9 - 6

5. TYPE the appropriate primary label type and PRESS[ENTER].

6. TYPE zero (0) in the default secondary label type fieldand PRESS [ENTER].

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Labels Menu.

Setting Up Security/OperatorIDs

To ensure scale security and prevent product loss, youshould use Operator IDs as security identification numbers.When set up, if you attempt to access the Supervisor Screen(by pressing the Reset button) from Self Service, the EnterSecret ID prompt displays. You must enter your ID numberto continue. This prevents consumers from tampering withthe scale.

Look At This

Hobart recommends setting up at least one Operator ID.This will prevent the consumer from accidentally taking thescale out of self service mode, where they could ultimatelyPRESS [ZERO] and modify the weigher.

To set up Security/Operator IDs:1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] to access the

Supervisor Menu.


9 - 7 Self Service


3. PRESS [F1] to select Operator ID’s.

4. TYPE the Operator ID Number and PRESS [ENTER].


Self Service 9 - 8

5. PRESS [F1] to accept the new operator.

6. TYPE the Access Level Value and PRESS [ENTER].For a detailed explanation of Operator AccessLevels, refer to the Appendix. (Level 9 isrecommended for Self Service.)

7. PRESS [F5] to select Edit Operator Name.8. TYPE the Operator Name and PRESS [ESC].9. TOGGLE [F8] to NO to require Operator Logon.

Setting Up Auto Lookup (forBoth 4 & 5 Digit CodeNumbers)

Set Up Auto Look-up as an added convenience for theconsumer. Auto Look-Up allows you to set the number ofdigits required for the system to automatically look-up theitem’s code number. CODE Numbers can range from 2-6digits. Standard UPC Item Codes are 4 digits, and accordingto the Produce Marketing Association, organic produce itemcodes are 5 digits.


9 - 9 Self Service

QUICK STEPS

From the Start a Run screen:1. PRESS [F10]2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F4]4. PRESS [F3]5. PRESS [F1]6. TOGGLE [F3] to YES7. PRESS [F4] to 48. TOGGLE [F5] to YES9. Enter number 9.10. PRESS [ESC]

To set up Auto Look-up:

1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] on the XTkeyboard, to access the Supervisor Menu.


3. PRESS [F4] to select Scale Operation Menu.4. PRESS [F3] to select Set Up Normal Scale Operation. The

Set Up Normal Scale Operation Screen displays.5. PRESS [F1]. You should now be on Page 2 of 3.

6. TOGGLE [F3] to select Yes.

7. TOGGLE [F4] to select 4 as the number of digits to beentered before the scale automatically looks up the PLU(code number).

8. TOGGLE [F5] to Yes. This specifies that auto lookup isset for both 4 and 5 digit code numbers.


Self Service 9 - 10

9. Enter the number in the Special Auto Lookup Digitprompt. For example, organic produce begins with a 9.You would enter 9 as the special auto lookup digit.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Operation Menu.

✎ Tip

PRESS [F1] Next Page to move to Page 3 of 3. You will Setup Self Service from this page.

Setting Up Self Service Self Service is a mode of operation, similar to Wait on aCustomer or PrePack. However, once Self Service is on, noadditional modes can be accessed until you exit Self Service.

☛ Note

Hobart recommends turning off all other modes when usingSelf Service.

QUICK STEPS

From the Start a Run Screen:1. PRESS [F10] on XT

keyboard2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F4]4. PRESS [F3]5. PRESS [F1]6. PRESS [F1] to Don’t

Display7. PRESS [F2] to Don’t






Display13. PRESS [F8] to Display14. PRESS [ESC]

To set the scale for Self Service:

1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] on the XTkeyboard.



9 - 11 Self Service

3. PRESS [F4] to select Scale Operation Menu.4. PRESS [F3] to select Set Up Normal Scale Operation. The

Set Up Normal Scale Operation Screen displays.5. PRESS [F1] twice. You should now be on Page 3 of 3.

6. TOGGLE [F2] through [F7] to select Don’t Display.7. TOGGLE [F8] to select Display.8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup.


Self Service 9 - 12

Setting Up the ConsumerDefault MerchandisingScreen

The Consumer Default Screen is the first screen that thecustomer uses. Set up the Consumer Default Screen tospecify what graphic and text displays. The followingscreens show the Merchandising default screen and theedited Merchandising screen.

Merchandising Default Screen

Edited Screen With Graphic


9 - 13 Self Service

QUICK STEPS

From the Start a Run Screen:1. PRESS [10]2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F8]4. Enter the self service

graphic number5. PRESS [F5]6. TYPE new text7. PRESS[ESC]8. Toggle [F8] for audible

beep9. PRESS [ESC]

To set up the Consumer Default Screen:


2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select ScaleSetup.

3. PRESS [F8] to select Setup Self Service.


Self Service 9 - 14

4. Enter the self service graphic number.5. PRESS [F5] to select Edit Self Service Text.

6. TYPE the new text in the Self Service Text box. Use[F1-F5] to edit the text.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Setup Self Service MenuScreen.


9 - 15 Self Service

8. Toggle [F8] to Yes or No to indicate if you want anaudible beep to alert you when there is a problem withthe scale (i.e. negative gross weight, label cassetteremoved, out of labels.)

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu Screen.

Zeroing the Scale

QUICK STEPS

From the Consumer DefaultScreen:1. PRESS Reset button2. Enter Secret ID, if

applicable3. Remove weight from

platter4. PRESS [ZERO]

Zero the scale to set the scale at 0.00 lbs. If the scale has anegative gross weight or is outside the zero maintenancezone, the following message displays.

To zero the scale:

1. From the Customer Default screen, PRESS the Resetbutton on the left side of the scale.

2. Enter a secret Operator ID, if required and PRESS[PRINT]. The Start a Run screen displays.

3. Remove any weight from the platter.4. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [ZERO].


Self Service 9 - 16

Using the Self ServiceProduce Keypad

The Produce Keypad provides a simple and user friendlymethod for your customer to use the self service scale. Set upspeedkeys to associate with specific product numbers.

Setting Up Speedkeys

QUICK STEPS

From the Start a Run Screen:1. PRESS [10]2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F2]4. PRESS [F8]5. Press the Speedkey on

Keypad6. Enter the Product Number,

then PRESS [ENTER]7. PRESS [F2]8. Type the description9. PRESS [ESC]

To set up Speedkeys:




9 - 17 Self Service

3. PRESS [F2] to select Flashkey/Speedkeys.

4. PRESS [F8] to select Speedkeys.

5. Press the desired speedkey on the Produce Keypad.


Self Service 9 - 18

6. Enter the Product Number that you want to associatewith the speedkey, then PRESS [ENTER].

7. PRESS [F2] to Edit Description, if desired.

8. TYPE the description in the Description box. Use [F1-F5]to edit the text.


9 - 19 Self Service

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Edit Speedkeys Screen.10. If you want to set up or change additional speedkeys:

a. PRESS [ENTER].b. PRESS [F1] to select Change Another Speedkey.c. Repeat steps 5-10.

11. PRESS [ESC] until you return to the Supervisor MenuScreen.

Deleting Speedkeys

QUICK STEPS

From the Start a Run Screen:1. PRESS [10]2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F2]4. PRESS [F8]5. Press the Speedkey on

Keypad6. PRESS [F8]7. PRESS [ESC]

To delete Speedkeys:



3. PRESS [F2] to select Flashkey/Speedkeys.


Self Service 9 - 20

4. PRESS [F8] to select Speedkeys.

5. Press the desired speedkey on the produce keypad thatyou want to delete.

6. PRESS [F8] to select Delete This Speedkey.7. Delete additional speedkeys.

--OR--PRESS [ESC] until you return to the Supervisor MenuScreen.


10 - 1 Security Labels

Chapter Ten: Interfacing the Security Label Applier with the Quantum

♦ Overview♦ Programming a Security Label to be Issued for a Specific PLU

• Programming a New PLU• Programming an Existing PLU

♦ Programming a Minimum Price Per Pound, Total Price, or Both


Security Labels 10 - 2

Interfacing the SLAwith the Quantum

The SLA interfaces with the standard Quantum Scale. TheSLA is designed to issue an Electronic Article Surveillance(EAS) label with a Quantum scale label.

Setup the Quantum to designate which packages shouldreceive a security label.

You can use any one or all of the following methods toapply a security label to a package:• PLU• Price Per Pound (Unit Price)• Total Package Price

✎ Tip

⇒ If you program the Quantum to apply a security label toa package with a specific PLU, the PLU overrides theminimum Unit Price and Total Price that you may haveset.

⇒ If you do not program the Quantum for a specific PLU, asecurity label will apply to the package if the price is thesame as, or is higher than the set minimum unit or totalprice.

Programming aSecurity Label to beIssued for a SpecificPLU

You can program the Quantum to have a security labelissued any time a specific PLU is used. This can beprogrammed when you enter a new product into thesystem, or when the product is already in the system.

☛ Note

If you are using a scale communication network, check thatthis method is supported with your network company.



Programming a New PLU

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F1]2. Type product number3. PRESS [ENTER]4. PRESS [F1]5. Select a Weigh Type6. PRESS [F2]7. Enter PLU Information8. PRESS [ESC]

1. At the Quantum Keypad, PRESS [SUPER MENUON/OFF]. If applicable, enter your Secret ID. TheSupervisor Menu displays.

2. PRESS [F1] to select Change Product.

3. Enter the new product number of the package that youwant the security label to apply.

4. PRESS [ENTER].5. PRESS [F1] to select Add a New Product.



6. Select a Weigh Type. Refer to the Quantum SupervisorManual for a further explanation of each softkey.

7. PRESS [F2] to change Do Not Apply Security Label toApply Security Label. [F2] toggles between Do Not ApplySecurity Label and Apply Security Label.

8. Enter the information for the new PLU.9. PRESS [ESC] on the Quantum Keypad to return to the

Supervisor Menu.



Programming an Existing PLU

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F1]2. Type product number3. PRESS [ENTER]4. PRESS [F2]5. PRESS [ESC]


2. PRESS [F1] to select Change Product.

3. Enter the product number of the package that you want toapply a security label.

4. PRESS [ENTER].5. PRESS [F2] to change Do Not Apply Security Label to

Apply Security Label. [F2] toggles between Do Not ApplySecurity Label and Apply Security Label.

6. PRESS [ESC] on the Quantum Keypad to return to theSupervisor Menu.



Programming aMinimum Price perPound, Total Price, orBoth

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F6]4. Enter the Minimum Unit

Price Per Pound5. PRESS [ENTER] or

[DOWN ARROW (▼)]6. Enter the Minimum Total

Price of the Package7. PRESS [ESC]

You can program the Quantum to issue a security labelwhen a package is equal to or above a designated price perpound (unit price), total package price, or both.


2. PRESS [F5] to select Scale Setup Menu.

3. PRESS [F3] to select Labels Menu.



4. PRESS [F7] to select Security Labels.

5. From the Security Labels Screen, enter the minimum UnitPrice per Pound. A security label will be issued to anypackage with a unit price the same as, or higher than theamount you enter. If a package has a lower price, thesecurity label will not be issued.

☛ Note

If you want a security label to be issued by Unit Price only,set Total Price to 0.00. Skip steps 6 and 7.

6. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to theminimum Total Price field.

7. Enter the minimum Total Price of the package. A securitylabel will be issued to any package with a total price thesame as, or higher than the amount you enter. If apackage has a lower total price, the security label will notbe issued.

8. PRESS [ESC] on the Quantum Keypad to return to theLabels Menu.


11 - 1 Merchandising Programs

Chapter Eleven: Working with MerchandisingPrograms

♦ Overview♦ Setting Up your Scale for Merchandising Programs♦ Using Advertised Price

• Advertised Sale Pricing• Value Packing• Retail Comparison• Activating the Advertised Price• Reactivating the Regular Price

♦ Using Frequent Shopper• Frequent Shopper Configuration Questions• Configuring Frequent Shopper• Activating Frequent Shopper• Reactivating the Regular Price

♦ Using Bonus Points• Setting Up Bonus Points

♦ Using Portion Pricing• Activating Portion Pricing• Setting Up Portion Pricing

♦ Using Percent Added• Activating the Percent Added• Reactivating the Regular Price


Merchandising Programs 11 - 2

Working withMerchandisingPrograms

Merchandising programs are available as optional features.You must have a custom label to use these features.

These include:• Advertised Price - creates interest and awareness in sale

items.• Frequent Shopper - rewards customer loyalty.• Bonus Points – used for store promotions.• Portion Pricing – gives customer an average cost per

portion.• Percent Added - adds a percentage to the total price.

☛ Note

Contact your Hobart Representative to help set up theseprograms.

Setting Up Your Scalefor MerchandisingPrograms

New firmware may need to be installed to accessMerchandising Programs. Contact your HobartRepresentative to install the appropriate firmware. Duringthe installation, the representative will unplug andreconnect the battery in order to delete the scale memory.

Look At This

You must Backup the database before Hobart Serviceupdates your scale software. After the scale is updated youmust Restore the Database. Refer to the Backup/RestoreChapter in this manual for detailed instructions.

Once your database is re-installed, add a custom label typeto enable merchandising fields. To add a custom label, referto the Backup Changes to Diskette section in the Backup/Restorechapter.

☛ Note

Hobart offers a wide variety of custom label options. Createyour own according to your merchandising needs.



Using AdvertisedPrice

Use an Advertised Price as a merchandising tool to createinterest in sale items and increase product sales. Increasecustomer loyalty by eliminating ‘consumer math’ oftenassociated with sale pricing, value packaging andcompetitive retail comparisons; the scale simply does it all.

There are three types of Advertised Price that can be usedwith many pricing incentives:• Advertised Sale Pricing• Value Packing• Retail Comparison

This feature is controlled by the scale configuration (set upfor you by your Hobart representative) and the custom labeltype you use. Refer to the following sections to set up thespecial pricing feature in your scale.• Activate the Advertised Price• Deactivate the Advertised Price

☛ Note

Advertised Price is an optional feature. Contact your localHobart Representative for more information.



Advertised Sale Pricing This can be used for:• Temporary Price Reduction• Temporary Low Price• Everyday Low Price

Here is an example of a label using Advertised Sale Pricing.

Value Packing This can be used for:• Big Pack• Value Pack• Assorted Family Pack

Here is an example of a label using Value Packing.



Retail Comparison This can be used for:• Savings compared to Regular Price• Our Everyday Price compared to “Competitor X”

Here is an example of a label using Retail Comparison.



Activating the AdvertisedPrice

QUICK STEP

From the Supervisor Menu:1. TYPE 10 and PRESS

[ENTER]2. TYPE the PLU and PRESS

[ENTER]3. PRESS [F8]4. Enter the custom label type5. PRESS [F8]6. Verify that the Regular

Price and Unit Pricedisplay

7. Enter the Sale Price in theUnit Price field

8. PRESS [ESC]

Activate the advertised price, for a specific PLU, byreplacing the existing label type with the custom label type.The custom label type will enable access to the unit price(sale) and regular price fields.

To activate the advertised price:1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE 10 in the Function Code

prompt and PRESS [ENTER].

2. From the Change Product Screen, TYPE the PLU numberin the Product Number field and PRESS [ENTER].

3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.



4. Enter the custom label type in the Primary or Secondarylabel type field.

5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page or PRESS [PREV] untilyou return to Page 1.

6. Verify that the Regular Price and Unit Price fields areactivated.

7. Enter the sale price in the Unit Price field and theoriginal price in the Regular Price field. Remember, theUnit Price cannot be greater than the Regular Price.

8. Modify additional PLUs --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return tothe Start a Run Screen.



Reactivating the RegularPrice

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. TYPE [10] and PRESS


[ENTER]3. PRESS [F8]4. Enter a label type5. PRESS [ESC]

Reactivate the regular unit price by replacing the speciallabel type with the regular label type and changing the unitprice back to the regular price.

To reactivate the regular price:1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE [10] in the Function

Code prompt and PRESS [ENTER].

2. TYPE the PLU number in the Product Number field andPRESS [ENTER].




4. Enter a label type in the label type field.

Look At This

Be aware that when you change the label type theinformation in the unit price field defaults to the advertisedprice amount. For example, if the regular price was $2.39and the unit price (sale) was $1.99, when you return to thedefault label type, the unit price remains $1.99.




Using FrequentShopper

Frequent Shopper, or Customer Loyalty programs aredesigned to focus on sales from existing customers. Theseprograms vary, but each is designed to build uponrelationships with existing customers.

For Hobart scales, the Frequent Shopper value is stored as theDiscount Price, Cents Off, or Percent Off in the PLU record.Frequent shopper values are printed on the label, in differentformats:• U-Pay which is the amount the customer pays.• U-Save which is the amount the customer saves.• Discounted Unit Price/lb. which is the discounted price per

pound. Which format you use is controlled by the scale configuration(set up for you by your Hobart Representative) and thecustom label type you use.

☛ Note

Frequent Shopper is an optional feature. Contact your localHobart Representative for more information.

✎ Tip - Loss Prevention The Discount Price field does not display in Operate mode.

However, the operator can temporarily toggle betweenregular and Frequent Shopper label types. This feature wasdesigned so the operator cannot change the price.

U-SAVE = THE FREQUENT SHOPPER SAVINGS ON THIS PACKAGE

U-PAY = THE FREQUENT SHOPPER TOTAL PRICE

DISCOUNT UNIT PRICE / LB = THE FREQUENT SHOPPER PRICE PER POUND



Frequent ShopperConfiguration Questions

Answer these questions to help configure your scale withthe necessary information. Your answers to these questionsare extremely important and should be discussed with yourHobart Representative. ◊ Are you currently using a Frequent Shopper, Club Card

or similar program? ◊ What POS system is the Frequent Shopper Software

running on?• IBM 4680, 4690, 4694• IBM - EM2• IBM - Cents Off• RII (Retail Innovations Inc.) – Cents Off• NCR 2127, 7000• ICL - SASI

◊ What Frequent Shopper formula(s) does your POSSoftware support?

◊ Which field(s) do you want to print on your label?

• U-Pay• U-Save• Discount Price/Lb.

Refer to examples in Adding Custom Label Types.

☛ Note All formulas for the calculation process are determined from

your answers to the configuration questions. At the scale,you enter the discount price, the percent off or the cents off,depending on your Frequent Shopper method selected. ForSupervisor procedures, refer to Setting Up Your Scale forMerchandising Programs.



Configuring FrequentShopper

Contact your Hobart Representative to configure the scalefor Frequent Shopper. The configuration is based on youranswers to the Configuration Questions.

Choose one of the following Frequent Shopper RoundingMethods to be set up by a Hobart Service Representative:

ConventionalRounding

When the number is greater than orequal to 5 you round up, when thenumber is less than 5 you round down.

Round Down(Truncate)

Regardless of the number, you alwaysround down (i.e. 8.659 rounds to 8.65).

Round Up Any number greater than zero (0), youalways round up (i.e. 8.659 rounds to8.66; 8.650 rounds to 8.65).

Choose one of the following Frequent Shopper DiscountMethods to be set up by a Hobart Service Representative:

Cents Off The monetary amount to be subtractedfrom the unit price.

Discount Price(/lb.)

The Frequent Shopper price perpound, which is lower than the unitprice per pound.

Percent Off The percentage of the total price whichis subtracted from the total price.

You must enter percentages inhundredths. For example, if you wanta discount of 5%, you must enter 500.



Activating Frequent Shopper Activate the Frequent Shopper feature, for a specific PLU,by replacing the existing label type with the FrequentShopper label type.

Hobart offers a wide variety of custom label options. Referto the following examples or create your own according toyour merchandising needs.

Regular Format Frequent Shopper Format

QUICK STEP

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F1]2. PRESS [F5]3. PRESS [F7]4. TYPE the PLU and PRESS

[ENTER]5. PRESS [F8]6. Enter Frequent Shopper

Custom Label Type7. PRESS [PREV]8. Enter the Frequent Shopper

price in discount field9. PRESS [ESCAPE]

To activate Frequent Shopper:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select change

product --OR-- TYPE 10 in the Function Code promptand PRESS [ENTER].

2. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field.3. PRESS [F7] to select All Fields.




5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.6. Enter the Frequent Shopper Custom Label Type in the

Primary Label Type field.




8. Enter the Frequent Shopper Price in the discount valuefield.

☛ Note

One of the following discount methods is set up by HobartService:• Discount Price• Cents Off• Percent Off - You must enter percentages in hundredths.

For example, if you want a discount of 5%, you mustenter 500.

9. Modify additional PLUs or PRESS [ESC] to return to theStart a Run Screen.


Reactivate the regular price, for a specific PLU, by replacingthe Frequent Shopper label type with the regular label type.This does not enable access to the discount value fields.

To deactivate Frequent Shopper:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change

Product.2. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field.3. PRESS [F7] to select All Fields.4. TYPE the PLU number in the Product Number field and

PRESS [ENTER].5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.6. Enter a label type in the Primary Label Type field.7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Start a Run Screen.

Look At This

It is extremely important that both the POS system and thescale use the same rounding method. If one is usingconventional rounding and the other is rounding up, thediscount prices will not always match. Check with yourHobart Representative for a detailed explanation.



Using Bonus Points Bonus Points are used for store promotions. Customers earnpoints when they purchase certain products and can usethose points toward merchandise, future discounts, or anyother promotions.

You assign the points to the products. The type of PLUdetermines how points are calculated.

• Random Weight and Fixed Weight PLUs – points areassigned based on the scale configuration and the pricemodifier.Example:If the scale is set up as price per 100 grams, the pointswill be assigned per 100 grams.

• Random Weight - By Count PLUs – points are assignedbased on the by count value.(Example):

If 4 points are assigned to a PLU with a by count value of 2, the customer receives 4 points if they purchase 2 of that product. If the customer purchases4 products with that PLU, the customer is awarded 8points.

Here is an example of a label using Bonus Points:

Net Wt/Ct

0.61 lb

2 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 1 9 9 7

$8.88/lb

Unit Price Total Price

$5.42

U-SAVE

BONUS POINTS

U-PAY

SAVE MORE

Card Holder$0.31

$5.1192

Packed On Best Before

Jul 20, 99 Aug 12, 99U.S.D.A.

DESCRIPTIONDESCRIPTION

STORE ADDRESS

☛ Note

You must have a custom label to activate the Bonus Pointsfeature. Contact your local Hobart Representative for moreinformation.



Setting Up Bonus Points To setup Bonus Points make sure you have the custom labelselected.

QUICK STEP



[ENTER]3. Enter PLU information4. PRESS [F8]5. Enter the custom label type

and PRESS [ENTER] 2 times6. Enter the number of points7. PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Supervisor Menu, Enter 10 in the FunctionCode, then Press [ENTER].

2. Enter the PLU and PRESS [ENTER].3. Enter the PLU information in the available fields.4. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.5. Enter the custom label type in the Primary Printer Label

Type field, then PRESS [ENTER] 2 times.

6. Enter the number of bonus points you want awarded forthe PLU in the Points field.

7. Modify addition PLUs –OR– PRESS [ESC] to return tothe Supervisor Menu.

Using Portion Pricing Portion pricing gives customers an average cost per portion.To determine the portion price, the scale divides the totalprice by the portion number. The user determines theportion number; the portion number can be from 0-65535.

There are three available fields:• Average Portion Price• Average Portion Weight• Portion

☛ Note

You must have a custom label to activate the Portion Pricingfeature. Contact your local Hobart Representative for moreinformation.



Here is an example of a label using Portion Pricing:

Net Wt/Ct

0.27 lb $8.88/lb

Unit Price


REGULARTOTAL PRICE $2.40

Save on More PriceU-SAVE U-PAY

$0.14 $2.26

$0.80

$0.75AVERAGE SAVE ON MORE PORTION COST

41

Points Earned


Jul 20, 99 Aug 12, 99U.S.D.A.

AVERAGE PORTION COST

Portions 3

2 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 1 9 9 7

Activating Portion PricingTo activate Portion Pricing:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.



2. PRESS [F4] to select Scale Operation Menu.

3. PRESS [F1] to select Set What the Operator Can Modify.

4. PRESS [F1] to select Next Page.5. PRESS [F7] to toggle Potions to Yes.

When the Portion Pricing feature is turned on (Yes selected),the portion field displays on the second page of the ChangeProduct Screen.



Setting Up Portion Pricing To use Portion Pricing make sure you have the custom labelselected.

QUICK STEP



[ENTER]3. Enter PLU information4. PRESS [F8]5. Enter the custom label type

and PRESS [ENTER]6. PRESS [ENTER] 2 times7. Enter the portion number

--OR-- PRESS [CLEAR]8. PRESS [ESC]

1. From the Supervisor Menu, Enter 10 in the FunctionCode, then Press [ENTER].

2. Enter the PLU and PRESS [ENTER].3. Enter the PLU information in the available fields.4. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.5. Enter the custom label type in the Primary Printer Label

Type field, then PRESS [ENTER]. The Portions fieldappears.

6. PRESS [ENTER] 2 times.

7. Enter the portion number in the Portions field --OR--PRESS [CLEAR] to set up forced portion. The forcedportion becomes –1.

8. Modify addition PLUs --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return tothe Supervisor Menu.



Using Percent AddedUse Percent Added when you want to add a percentage tothe total price. This is used when you perform additionalservice, or when a private club wants to add a surcharge.

Here is an example of a label using Percent Added:

Net Wt/Ct

0.27 lb

2 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 1 9 9 7

$2.99/lb

Unit Price Total Price

$0.81PERCENT ADDED 0.05%


Jul 20, 99 Aug 12, 99U.S.D.A.


☛ Note

Percent Added is an optional feature. Contact your localHobart Representative for more information.

Activating the Percent Added

QUICK STEP



[ENTER]3. PRESS [F8]4. Enter the custom label type5. PRESS [F8]6. Verify that the Percent

Added field displays7. Enter the percent you want

to add in the PercentAdded field

8. PRESS [ESC]

Activate the percent added, for a specific PLU, by replacingthe existing label type with the custom label type. Thecustom label type will enable access to the unit price andpercent added fields.

To activate the percent added:1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE 10 in the Function Code





3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.4. Enter the custom label type in the Primary or Secondary

label type field.


6. Verify that the Percent Added field is activated.



7. Enter the percent you want to add in the Percent Addedfield. You must enter percentages in hundredths. Forexample, if you want to add 5%, you must enter 500.



Reactivate the regular price, for a specific PLU, by replacingthe Percent Added label type with the regular label type.This does not enable access to the percent added field.

To deactivate Percent Added:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change

Product.2. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field.3. PRESS [F7] to select All Fields.4. TYPE the PLU number in the Product Number field and

PRESS [ENTER].5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.6. Enter a label type in the Primary Label Type field.7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Start a Run Screen.


12 - 1 EAN13 Barcode

Chapter Twelve: Configuring an EAN13 Barcode

♦ Overview♦ Setting Up Your Scale For EAN13 Barcodes1. Setting the EAN13 Default Prefix for PLUs♦ Entering a New Product Using EAN13 Format♦ Changing an Existing PLU to EAN13 Format♦ Setting Up an EAN13 Barcode for Itemized Labels


EAN13 Barcode 12 - 2

Configuring an EAN13Barcode

The EAN13 numbering system enables an extra character inthe barcode creating more flexibility in pricing (i.e. 999.99).A total of 12 digits are available for in-store use. The set upof these digits is entirely at the discretion of the retailer,with the exception of the check digit which is printed in the13th position on every EAN13 bar code. The EAN13 systemis intended to give retailers maximum flexibility to includeany non-standard codes, which may be required.

There are four EAN13 barcode formats:• Random Weight• Fixed Weight• By Count• Item Total

Each PLU record type (Random Weight, Fixed Weight, andBy Count) and itemized totals label are configurable to anEAN13 barcode format.

This feature is controlled by the scale configuration (set upfor you by your Hobart Representative) and the customlabel type you use. The information entered into the scaleconfiguration is used to determine what fields display onthe Change Product Screen.

Refer to the following sections to setup EAN13 Barcodes:• Setting Up Your Scale for EAN13 Barcodes• Setting the EAN13 Default Prefix• Entering a New Product Using EAN13 Format• Changing an Existing PLU to EAN13 Format• Setting Up EAN13 Barcodes for Itemized Labels

☛ Note

For more information on the configuration of EAN13Barcodes and EAN13 barcode examples, Refer to theAppendix: Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration.



Setting Up Your Scalefor EAN13 Barcodes

New firmware may need to be installed to access EAN13Barcodes. Contact your Hobart Representative to install theappropriate firmware. During the installation, therepresentative will unplug and reconnect the battery whichwill delete the scale memory.

Look At This

You must Backup the database before Hobart Serviceupdates your scale software. After the scale is updated youmust Restore the Database. Refer to the Backup/RestoreChapter in this manual for detailed instructions.

Once your database is re-installed, add a custom label typeto enable merchandising fields. To add a custom label, referto the Backup Changes to Diskette section in the Backup/Restorechapter.

☛ Note

Custom EAN13 labels must be ordered through HobartProduct Support. Contact your Hobart Representative forappropriate information.

Setting the EAN13Default Prefix for PLUs

You can set a Random Weight, Fixed Weight, and By Countdefault prefix for all new products entered. You must havean EAN13 barcode label type selected for a product to accessan EAN13 barcode.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F3]4. Enter the custom label5. PRESS [F1]6. Type the EAN13 default

prefix7. PRESS [ESC]8. PRESS [ESC]

To set up an EAN13 Barcode:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu –OR—ENTER Function Code [48].




3. PRESS [F3] to select Label Information. The LabelInformation Screen displays.

4. Enter the EAN13 custom label type in Primary label typefield. The custom label will print for all new PLUscreated.




6. Type the EAN13 default prefix for Random Weight,Fixed Weight, and By Count to be used when new PLUsare created. If applicable, PRESS [(▼) DOWN ARROW]to move to the next field.



☛ Note

The number of X’s set up in your scale configurationdetermines the number of digits that can be entered into thedefault prefix. Refer to the Appendix: Understanding EAN13Scale Configuration for more information on scaleconfiguration.

Entering a NewProduct Using EAN13Format

New PLUs default to the EAN13 barcode when the defaultlabel type on the Label Information Screen is set to thecustom label that contains the EAN13 barcode. When thecustom label type is selected, different prompts display onyour Change Product Screen depending on your EAN13 andscale configurations.



QUICK STEP



[ENTER]3. PRESS [F1]4. Select a Weigh Type5. Enter information into

Change Product fields6. PRESS [ESC]

To set up a new product using EAN13 format:1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE 10 in the Function Code


2. From the Change Product Screen, TYPE a new PLUnumber in the Product Number field and PRESS[ENTER].

3. PRESS [F1] to add a new product.4. Select a Weigh Type.5. Enter information into the fields on the Change Product

Screen. The fields that display on Page 1 depend on yourEAN13 and scale configurations.



6. Refer to the following table to enter information into theChange Product fields. PRESS [(▼) DOWN ARROW] tomove through the fields.

In this Field Enter

Product Number(PLU)

The product number and PRESS[ENTER]. The Description promptdisplays.

Description The name or description of the product.

To enter the description:1. PRESS [F5] to select change text

field. The Text Editor displays.2. Enter the description.

Remember that your label selectiondetermines the text field size and yourfont size determines the number ofavailable characters.

EAN Prefix Default prefix set on Label InformationScreen. The default can be changed.

EAN # The EAN13 code assigned to this PLU.

Vendor # The Vendor number and PRESS [ENTER].

Product # The Product number and PRESS[ENTER].

By Count The by count value. This can be anynumber from 0 to 99. If you PRESS[CLEAR] the field changes to Forced ByCount and the operator is forced to entera by count value.

• Random Weight PLUs with a by count = 0 are priced as they are weighed.

• Random Weight PLUs with a by count > 1 are priced by the count (i.e., 3 for $1.00).

• Fixed Weight PLUs must have a by count > 1.

NOTE:If you enter a by count value > 1 forrandom weight items, the Tare fieldchanges to Exception Price.

Unit Price The unit price of the product. The pricecan be up to 5 digits depending on theconfiguration.

If you PRESS [CLEAR] the field changesto Forced Price and the operator is forcedto enter a price value.



In this Field Enter

Tare The tare value. This is the weight of thepackaging for which the customer doesnot pay (i.e., plastic wrap or a producetray). If using kilograms, the tare valuemust be a multiple of .005. If usingpounds, the tare value must be a multipleof .01.

If you PRESS [CLEAR] the field changesto Forced Tare and the operator is forcedto enter a tare value.

NOTE:The Tare prompt may not display,depending on your configuration. ByCount and Fixed Weight PLUs do nothave a Tare value.

Platter Tare The tare value of the container. The valueis calculated by placing the container onthe scale when your cursor is in the tarefield.

Net Weight The net content or net weight of a fixedweight item. Must be entered as Grams orOunces.

Exception Price The price that is used when a by countproduct is sold, but not by the by countquantity. For example, if apples are 3 for$1, the price (or exception price) for 1apple might be $.35.

Note: This prompt may not displaydepending on your scale configuration.

Shelf Life The number of days that a product canremain on the shelf. This number is usedto calculate the sell by date.

Product Life The number of days for which theproduct is good (consumable). Thisnumber is used to calculate the BestBefore and Use By dates.

Class The number of the class to which theproduct reports. A class is a group ofsimilar products categorized together forreporting.




Changing an ExistingPLU to EAN13 Format

Activate the EAN13 format for a specific PLU by replacingthe existing label type with the custom label type. When youselect the custom label type for a specific PLU, differentfields display on the Change Product Screen depending onyour EAN13 and scale configurations.

QUICK STEP



[ENTER]3. PRESS [F8]4. Enter the custom label type5. PRESS [F8] until you return

to page 16. Enter information into

Change Product fields7. PRESS [ESC]

To change to EAN13 format:1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE [10] in the Function

Code prompt and PRESS [ENTER].




3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.4. Enter the custom label type in the Primary Label Type

field.


6. Enter information into the Change Product Screen. Thefields that display on Page 1 depend on your EAN13 andscale configurations. Refer to the previous table in thischapter to enter information in the Change Productfields.




Setting Up EAN13Barcodes for ItemizedLabels

You can print an EAN13 Barcode on an Item Total Label oron an Itemized Receipt when you use the AccumulatedItems Mode. Refer to Chapter 9: Scale Setup for moreinformation on Itemized Labels.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F3]3. PRESS [F6]4. Toggle [F3-F5] to Yes or

No, if appropriate5. TYPE the EAN13 number,

the PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]6. Type the EAN13 default

prefix7. PRESS [ESC]8. PRESS [ESC]

To print an EAN13 Barcode on an Itemized Label:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu --OR-- ENTER Function Code [59].




3. PRESS [F6] to select Itemized Labels.

4. From the Itemized Label Screen, toggle [F3 - F5] to printeither an Itemized Receipt or Totals Label.

5. Type the EAN13 number to print on the label, thenPRESS [ENTER] or [▼].

6. Type the EAN13 default prefix.

☛ Note

The number of X’s set up in your scale configurationdetermines the number of digits that can be entered into thedefault prefix. Refer to the Appendix: Understanding EAN13Scale Configuration for more information on scaleconfiguration.




13 - 1 Scale Communications

Chapter Thirteen: Understanding Hardwire TCP/IP Scale Communications

♦ Understanding the IP Address• Setting Up IP Addresses on an Isolated Network• Setting Up IP Addresses on an Existing Network

_ Intranet Scale IP Address Assignment Form♦ Setting Up TCP/IP Networks

• Sample Ethernet Wiring Illustration• Setting Up ScaleMaster Configuration

_ Scale IP Address_ Server Scale IP Address_ Subnet Mask_ Well Known Port Number_ Department IP Addresses_ Saving Changes

• Example: ScaleMaster• Setting Up ScaleMaster Located on a Different Network (Gateway IP Address)• Setting Up IntraNet Configuration

_ Scale IP Address_ Server Scale IP Address_ Subnet Mask_ Well Known Port Number_ Department IP Addresses_ Saving Changes

• Example: IntraNet• Setting Up ScaleMaster/IntraNet Configuration• Example: ScaleMaster/IntraNet

♦ Testing the Scales TCP/IP Connection• PING Test• L.E.D.

Quantum Scale Systems

Scale Communications 13 - 2

UnderstandingHardwire TCP/IP ScaleCommunications

Transmission Communications Protocol/Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) is a communication protocol which maybe used tomake your scale system communicate faster and morereliably. It serves as a traffic manager for sending andreceiving packets of information between scales anddevices. Scales can be automatically updated withinformation which is sent directly from a server scale orScaleMaster .

☛ Note

TCP/IP is an optional feature. For more information contactyour local Hobart Representative.

You must have an Ethernet card in order for TCP/IP towork. Refer to the Understanding Ethernet Networks in theAppendix for more information.

Understanding the IPAddress

The IP Address is a naming convention used to identify ascale or device located on a network. Each IP Address mustbe unique to each scale (other scales or devices on a networkcannot have the same IP Address).

Contact the Network Administrator for the correct IPAddress information.



Setting Up IP Addresses onan Isolated Network

The following shows an example of an IP Address and thecomponents of an IP addressing scheme for scales connectedto a Hobart only network.

This is an IP Address example in an isolated network:

Base_Number . Store_Number . Department_Number . Scale_Number

127 208 003 001

IP Address 127 . 208 . 003 . 001

IP Address Range Description

Base_Number (1-254) This is a number between 1 and254.

Store_Number (1-254) This is a number assigned by thecustomer that represents eachstore in a chain.

Department_Number (1-254) This number identifies adepartment in a store.

ServerScale_Number (1-254)

This represents the Scale IDnumber.

Intranet ClientScale_Number (2-19)

This represents the client Scale IDnumber. You can have 18 clientscales for a hardwired setup and19 client scales for a wirelesssetup.

Setting Up IP Addresses onan Existing Network

When you have an existing network you must contact yourNetwork Administrator for the correct IP Addresses. Usethe IntraNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form on the nextpage to fill in the IP Addresses assigned by your NetworkAdministrator.



IntraNet Scale IP Address Assignment FormScale Network Addressing Example Base_NumberStore_Number Dept._Number Scale_Number

I. Server Scale IP Address:Server scale located in the Department

A) Bakery: XXX.XXX.001.001

B) Cheese: XXX.XXX.002.001

C) Deli: XXX.XXX.003.001

D) Meat: XXX.XXX.004.001

E) Service Meat: XXX.XXX.005.001

F) Sea Food: XXX.XXX.006.001

G) Produce: XXX.XXX.007.001

H) Specialty: XXX.XXX.008.001

ScaleMaster : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

(refer to your ScaleMaster documentation)

II. Scale Subnet Mask (same for all scales):

Scale Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000

III.Well Known Port Number (same for all scales):

Well known port number: 6000

IV.Client Scale IP Addresses:(Intranet Configuration)

Note: Each Department will require aseparate Server with the DepartmentClient Scale IP information added.

A) Bakery: XXX.XXX.001.001Client Scales XXX.XXX.001.002 - 019

B) Cheese: XXX.XXX.002.001Client Scales XXX.XXX.002.002 - 019

C) Deli: XXX.XXX.003.001Client Scales XXX.XXX.003.002 - 019

D) Meat: XXX.XXX.004.001Client Scales XXX.XXX.004.002 - 019

E) Service Meat: XXX.XXX.005.001Client Scales XXX.XXX.005.002 - 019

F) Sea Food: XXX.XXX.006.001Client Scales XXX.XXX.006.002 - 019

G) Produce: XXX.XXX.007.001Client Scales XXX.XXX.007.002 - 019

H) Specialty: XXX.XXX.008.001Client Scales XXX.XXX.008.002 – 019

Server Scale: . . .

(A maximum of 18 Client Scales can be added to a Department forHardwired TCP/IP and 19 Client Scales can be added for Wireless TCP/IP)

1) Scale: . . .

2) Scale: . . .

3) Scale: . . .

4) Scale: . . .

5) Scale: . . .

6) Scale: . . .

7) Scale: . . .

8) Scale: . . .

9) Scale: . . .

10) Scale: . . .

11) Scale: . . .

12) Scale: . . .

13) Scale: . . .

14) Scale: . . .

15) Scale: . . .

16) Scale: . . .

17) Scale: . . .

18) Scale: . . .

(wireless)19) Scale: . . .

ScaleMaster : . . .



Setting Up TCP/IPNetworks

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. PRESS [F5]2. PRESS [F6]3. PRESS [F2]4. PRESS [F2]

Refer to the Appendix for a detailed explanation of TCP/IPNetwork Configurations and Ethernet Networks.

To set up TCP/IP networks:


2. PRESS [F6] to select Communications Menu.3. PRESS [F2] to select Network.4. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F2] until

IntraNet or ScaleMaster is the selected network type.

☛ Note

There are several options available. Each time [F2] is pressedit cycles through the options. Select either ScaleMaster orIntraNet based on configuration needs.

✎ Tip

When you enter information on the TCP/IP NetworkScreen:

⇒ PRESS [ENTER] to move from one number field to thenext.

⇒ Use the Left and Right arrow keys to move within anumber field.

⇒ Use the Up and Down arrow keys to move to a numberfield above or below the number field that is active.



Sample Ethernet WiringIllustration

You can setup your network for one of the types listedbelow:

• Multi Scales connected to a Hub with ScaleMaster• Multi Scales connected in Stand Alone Department

(configured with IntraNet single point configuration)• Multi Scales connected to a Hub with ScaleMaster

(Departments configured with IntraNet single pointconfiguration)

Scalemaster Example:

Look At This

The following information gives you a further explanationof each network type. The IP addresses given in theexamples may vary for your network.



Setting Up ScaleMasterConfiguration

Use ScaleMaster when you have one main network in astore which all information is transferred to each scale. Referto the Appendix in this manual or the ScaleMaster TCP/IPSupplement manual (F-33863) for more information.

QUICK STEPS

From the TCP/IP NetworkScreen:1. PRESS [F2]2. TYPE Scale IP Address3. TYPE 0’s for Server Scale IP

Address4. TYPE Subnet Mask value5. PRESS [ESC]6. PRESS Reset button

To set up ScaleMaster:1. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F2] until

ScaleMaster is the selected network type.

Scale IP Address 2. TYPE the appropriate Scale IP Address information.PRESS [ENTER] to move through the number fields inthe scale IP address.

☛ Note

Each IP address must be unique to each scale.



Server Scale IP Address 3. The Server Scale IP Address should be set to all 0’s.

Subnet Mask 4. TYPE the Subnet Mask value. It is the same for all scales.PRESS [ENTER] to move through the number fields inthe subnet mask.

Well Known Port Number The Well Known Port Number defaults to 6000 and shouldnot be changed.

Department IP Addresses Do not set up Department IP addresses when you are usingthe ScaleMaster network.

Saving Changes5. After entering all scale information, PRESS [ESC]. The

following screen displays:



6. PRESS the RESET button (located on the left side of thescale) for 3 seconds and release. This will reset the scalewith the updated communication settings. The scale willautomatically power back on.

EXAMPLE: ScaleMaster

Multi Scales Connected to aHub with ScaleMaster

The following illustrates scales connected to the network viaa Hub with ScaleMaster configuration.

Each scale must use a unique IP address.

From the TCP/IP Network Screen, ENTER the following:

TCP/IP Network Scale Menu

Type: ScaleMaster (same for each scale)

Scale IP Address (unique for each scale)127 . 208 . 003 . 001

Server IP Address (same for each scale)000 . 000 . 000 . 000

Subnet Mask (same for each scale)255 . 255 . 255 . 000

Well known port number 6000 (same for each scale)

☛ Note

If your scales are not physically located on the samenetwork as the PC which is running ScaleMaster, you mustset up the Gateway IP Addresses for that network. Contactyour Network Administrator for specific Gateway detailsfor Network IP Routing. (Refer to Setting Up ScaleMasterLocated on a Different Network [Gateway IP Address].)

After entering all IP Address information:1. PRESS [ESC] to save the new information. The display

screen alerts you to restart your scale.2. PRESS the RESET button (located on the left side of the

scale) for 3 seconds and release. This resets the scale withthe updated communication settings and enables thechanges to take affect. The scale will automaticallypower back on.



Setting up ScaleMasterLocated on a DifferentNetwork (Gateway IPAddress)

If your scales are not physically located on the samenetwork as the PC which is running ScaleMaster, you mustset up the Gateway IP Addresses for that network.

☛ Note

Contact your Network Administrator for specific Gatewaydetails for Network IP Routing.

To enter a Gateway IP Address:1. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F7] to select

Network IP Routing Table Screen.

2. Enter the Gateway IP Address and the Network IPAddress as specified by the Network Administrator.

Gateway IP AddressXXX . XXX . XXX . XXX

Network IP AddressXXX . XXX . XXX . XXX

☛ Note

In order for all of the scales to communicate in the networkusing gateways, all of the scales in the network must havethe same Subnet Mask.



Gateway and Network IPExamples

The following illustration is an example of a commonnetwork configuration. There are a variety of networksystem configurations using Gateway IP Addresses andNetwork IP Addresses. Contact your NetworkAdministrator for more complex networks.

Location Gateway IP Address Network IP Address

Store 1 10.003.128.008 000.000.000.000

Store 2 12.003.128.024 000.000.000.000

Headquarters 14.003.128.007 000.000.000.000

☛ Note

The Network IP Address Default is 000.000.000.000.

If you only want to communicate to one store in thenetwork, you must enter that stores Network IP Address.

Refer to the examples on the next page.



Refer to the following scenarios for examples of how to useGateway and Network IP Addresses. Use the illustration onthe previous page as a reference.

Scenario 1: If the Network Address has a default of 0’s, information issent through all Gateways to all stores in the network.

Example:For a scale at Store 1 to communicate to ScaleMaster or anyother scale in the network:

Gateway IP Address = 010.003.128.008Network IP Address = 000.000.000.000

Example:For a scale at Store 2 to communicate to ScaleMaster or anyother scale in the network:


Scenario 2: If you only want to communicate to one store in thenetwork, you must enter that stores Network IP Address.

Example:For a scale at Store 1 to communicate only to a scale atStore 2 in the network:


Example:For a scale at Store 2 to communicate only to a scale atStore 1 in the network:


☛ Note

If a store is between two Gateways, you must enter theGateway and Network IP Address for both Gateways.

☛ Note

Gateways are configured by your Network Administrator.



Setting Up IntraNetConfiguration

Use IntraNet when you want one scale to act as the centralserver scale in a department environment. All other scales inthe department communicating with the server scale areknown as client scales. Refer to the Appendix for furtherexplanation.

When your IntraNet network is setup the server scale doesthe following:• Collects totals for all scales in the department• Compares data at reset of a client scale• Reloads data to client scale if data is different from the

server scale at reset

☛ Note

When you reset a client scale, the data is compared andupdated to match the server scale database.

☛ Note

Changes should be made on the server scale if all clientscales do not have a complete department IP address list.This is done to ensure information is sent to all scales in thenetwork. Refer to Department IP Addresses for further details.

QUICK STEPS

From the TCP/IP NetworkScreen:1. PRESS [F2]2. TYPE the Scale IP Address3. TYPE the Server Scale IP

Address4. TYPE the Subnet Mask

value.5. PRESS [F8]6. PRESS [F3]7. TYPE Scale IP Addresses in

the department list8. PRESS [ESC]9. PRESS [ESC]10. PRESS Reset button

To set up intranet:1. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F2] until

IntraNet is the selected network type.



Scale IP Address2. TYPE the appropriate Scale IP Address information for

each scale. PRESS [ENTER] to move through the numberfields in the scale IP address.

☛ Note

Each IP Address must be unique to each scale or device onthe network (refer to the Intranet Scale IP Address AssignmentForm).

Server Scale IP Address 3. TYPE the appropriate Server Scale IP Address. (Refer tothe IntraNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form.) PRESS[ENTER] to move through the number fields in theserver scale IP address.



Look At This

All Client Scales in the IntraNet network will have the same“Server Scale IP Address” as the Server Scale.

Only the Server Scale will have the same “Scale IP Address”and “Server Scale IP Address”.

Subnet Mask 4. TYPE the Subnet Mask value. It is the same for all scales.(Refer to the IntaNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form.)PRESS [ENTER] to move through the number fields inthe subnet mask.

Well Known Port Number The Well Known Port Number defaults to 6000 and shouldnot be changed.



Department IP Addresses 5. PRESS [F8] to select Setup Department IP Addresses.The Department IP Address List Menu is where you setup and identify each scale in the department. The list isused by each scale to determine which scales receive thechanges.

☛ Note

Any scale that you make the PLU changes on becomes a“temporary” master and sends all the changes to the scalesin the department list.

Look At This

If there are no Scale IP Addresses in the department list on aclient scale, make changes on the server scale to ensure toinformation is sent to all scales in the network.

6. PRESS [F3] to select New IP Address. A line numberdisplays with space to enter the client scale IP Address.



7. TYPE the IP Address for the client scales on the linewhich displays. PRESS [ENTER] to move through thenumber fields in the IP address. Up to eighteen (18)client scales can be added to a department.--OR--PRESS [F5] to delete an IP Address from a departmentlist.

This is an example of a scale’s department list:

☛ Note

Do not include the IP Address of the scale you are workingon or the server scale IP Address.

Refer to the table below for an example of what each scale’sdepartment lists would include for a department that has 4scales:

Scale Department List Server IPAddress

Server Scale 001 127.208.003.002127.208.003.003127.208.003.004

127.208.003.001

Client Scale 002 127.208.003.003127.208.003.004

127.208.003.001

Client Scale 003 127.208.003.002127.208.003.004

127.208.003.001

Client Scale 004 127.208.003.002127.208.003.003

127.208.003.001



☛ Note

The Department IP Address List identifies the scales bydepartment. Additional departments require a separateserver setup for each department.

8. After entering the client scales IP Addresses, PRESS[ESC] to return to the TCP/IP Network Screen.

Look At This

Ensure your server has an active database before you resetany client scales.

Saving Changes 9. After entering all scale information, PRESS [ESC]. Thefollowing screen displays:

10. PRESS the RESET button (located on the left side of thescale) for 3 seconds and release. This will reset the scalewith the updated communication settings. The scale willautomatically power back on.

Look At This

Contact your local Hobart Service Technician to service ascale. Before a scale is serviced, make sure the scale isdisconnected from the network to ensure an incorrect orempty database does not get loaded onto the network.

Ensure your server has an active database before you resetany client scales.



EXAMPLE: IntraNet

Multi Scales Connected inStand Alone Department

The following configuration shows two (2) stand alonescales connected to a hub using the Intranet option.


Server Scale SetupTCP/IP Network Scale Menu

Type: Intranet (same for client)


Server IP Address (same for client)127 . 208 . 003 . 001

Subnet Mask (same for client)255 . 255 . 255 . 000

Well known port number 6000 (same for client)

Server Scale’s Department IPAddress List

From the Department IP Address List Screen, set up the ClientScale’s Department IP Address on the server. A maximum ofeighteen (18) client scales for a single department can beadded to a Server.

Department IP Address List

1) 127 . 208 . 003 . 002 (Client scale 002 IP Address)

Client Scale 002 Setup From the TCP/IP Network Screen, ENTER the Client Scale’sIP Address. All other fields must be the same as the Serverinformation.

Scale IP Address127 . 208 . 003 . 002



scale) for three (3) seconds and release. This resets thescale with the updated communication settings andenables the changes to take affect. The scale willautomatically power back on.



Setting UpScaleMaster/IntraNetConfiguration

In a ScaleMaster/IntraNet configuration, ScaleMastercommunicates to the server scale in each department, thenthe server scale communicates to all the client scales in itsdepartment. Refer to the Appendix for further explanation.

To set up ScaleMaster/IntraNet:1. Configure ScaleMaster to communicate only to the

Server Scale. Refer to your ScaleMaster TCP/IPSupplement manual.

2. Configure the Server Scale to communicate to the clientscales in the network. Follow the steps in Setting UpIntraNet Configuration to setup your intranet network.

Look At This

Make sure ScaleMaster is not configured to communicatewith the client scales.

EXAMPLE:ScaleMaster/IntraNet

The following illustrates scales connected to the network viaa hub and configured for IntraNet. Multi Scales are connectedto a Hub with ScaleMaster, departments are configured withIntraNet single point configuration.


Server Scale SetupTCP/IP Network Scale Menu

Type: IntraNet (same for client)


Server IP Address (same for client)127 . 208 . 003 . 001

Subnet Mask (same for client)255 . 255 . 255 . 000

Well known port number 6000 (same for client)



Server Scale Department IPAddress List

From the Department IP Address List Screen, set up the Clientscales Department IP Address information on the server. Amaximum of eighteen (18) client scales can be added to aServer.

Department IP Address List

1) 127 . 208 . 003 . 002 (Client Scale 002)2) 127 . 208 . 003 . 003 (Client Scale 003)

-Through -18) 127 . 208 . 003 . 018 (Client Scale 018)

Client Scales 002 thru 018Setup

From the TCP/IP Network Screen, Enter each Scales IPAddress. All other fields must be the same as the Serverinformation.

Scale IP Address127 . 208 . 003 . 002 (Client Scale 002)127 . 208 . 003 . 003 (Client Scale 003)

-Through -127 . 208 . 003 . 018 (Client Scale 018)



scale) for three (3) seconds and release. This resets thescale with the updated communication settings andenables the changes to take affect. The scale willautomatically power back on.



Testing the ScalesTCP/IP Connection

You can determine if scales are connected andcommunicating by doing a PING test, or by checking theEthernet Diagnostic L.E.D.’s on the left side of the scale.

PING TestYou can PING another scale or device to determine if thescale is communicating properly. Once you type an IPaddress and start the PING, your scale will indicate if thereis a response from the other device.

QUICK STEPS

From the TCP/IP NetworkScreen:1. PRESS [F4]2. TYPE Scale IP Address3. PRESS [F3]4. PRESS [ESC]

To PING a scale IP address:1. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F4] to select

Ping an IP Address.

2. TYPE the IP address of a different scale or device in thenetwork.

3. PRESS [F3] to select Start Pinging.



You will receive one of the following responses to determineif the scales are communicating:

• This screen indicates GOOD communication:# of pings sent = # of replies

• This screen indicates MARGINAL communication:# of pings sent “is greater than” # of replies

☛ Note

If the screen indicates marginal communication, ping theaddress again, the scale may not have been used in awhile.If the scale continues to have a low response, verify thescales are communicating by checking the L.E.D. asdescribed in the next section.



• This screen indicates NO communication:# of replies = 0

☛ Note

If the screen indicates no communication, check the EthernetDiagnostic L.E.D.’s to see if the scales are communicating. Ifthe L.E.D.’s are not functioning, check the error log, refer toTroubleshooting IP Addresses or reset each scale by pressingand releasing the Reset button then repeat the PING test.

4. PRESS [ESC] to return to the TCP/IP Network Screen.



L.E.D.The following steps will confirm that the scales areconnected and communicating with each other over thenetwork.

1. Check the Ethernet Diagnostic L.E.D.’s to see if they arefunctioning correctly.

This L.E.D. Does This

Ethernet Diagnostic L.E.D.’s LNK (Link) Indicates a link has been established withthe Ethernet network. This will be onwhen the scale is connected to an Ethernetnetwork.

POL (Polarity) Verifies the polarity of the receive pairfrom the network. This should be off ifthe network wiring polarity is correct.(Note: Even if the light is on, the scalemay still communicate and respond to aping test.)

COL (Collision) Indicates a collision condition on theEthernet network. This condition iscaused by 2 devices trying tocommunicate at the same time. Thisshould be off most of the time. (Note: Thislight may occasionally blink if connectedto an active Network.)

RCV (Receive) Indicates network activity. Any networkactivity should cause it to flash. Intensenetwork activity may cause it to appear toremain on.

XMT (Transmit) Indicates that the scale is communicatingto the Ethernet network. Duringcommunication this will flash or mayappear to remain on.



2. Update a product on the Server Scale (updates areautomatic with the Intranet network selection).

3. Check the Server Scale for the Transmission Occuredmessage.

4. Verify that the product update is reflected on the ClientScales associated with the Server.

☛ Note

If an error occurred and the Ethernet Diagnostic L.E.D.’s arefunctioning correctly, check the error log, refer toTroubleshooting IP Addresses or reset each scale by pressingand releasing the Reset button then repeat steps 2 through 4.


14 - 1 Wireless Scale Communications

Chapter Fourteen: Understanding Wireless TCP/IP Scale Communications

♦ Understanding Frequencies• What is Frequency Hopping?• What is Direct Sequence?• Frequency Protocols

♦ Setting Up Wireless Communication• What is an Access Point?• What is a PC Network Card and Adapter Board?• Using an Antenna

♦ Configuring Wireless TCP/IP Networks• Configuring the Network Card

_ Spectrum 24, Spectrum 802.11, and Telxon/Aironet 802.11_ Telxon/Aironet 2.4_ Telxon/Aironet 900

• Signal Strength Meter Test


Wireless Scale Communications 14 - 2

UnderstandingWireless TCP/IP ScaleCommunication

Wireless TCP/IP operates the same as hardwired TCP/IPexcept the wire is replaced with a radio connection. Allexisting applications, which operate over the network, willoperate using wireless TCP/IP scale communication.

Wireless communication is currently supported by thefollowing communication types:• Symbol Spectrum 24: Spring (proprietary protocol) &

802.11 frequency hopping• Telxon/Aironet 900mhz: TMA (proprietary protocol)• Telxon/Aironet 2.4ghz: TMA (proprietary protocol)• Telxon/Aironet: 802.11 frequency hopping 2mbps,

802.11 direct sequence 2mbps, & 802.11 direct sequence11mbps

☛ Note

For detailed information on your wireless systemconfiguration, refer to your provider’s manual (Symbol,Telxon, and Aironet).

UnderstandingFrequencies

Information is transmitted through wireless TCP/IPcommunication utilizing spread spectrum technology.Spread spectrum technology is a way to send data over theair waves. It was developed for military communicationsthat were resistant to jamming, interference, and detection.This technology makes it difficult for anyone to detect thepresence of the signal. The goal is to transmit informationwith as much data as possible, sending it as far and as fastas possible.

Frequency Hopping (FS) and Direct Sequence (DS) are themost commonly used methods for the spread spectrumtechnology. Although the basic idea is the same, they havemany distinct characteristics that result in different radioperformances.

In order for scales or devices to communicate, they must allbe on the same frequency (900Mhz or 2.4GHz) and the samespreading technique (FS or DS). The frequency that you usedepends on your application and environment.

☛ Note

Each Country in the International market has a frequencyrange specific to their country.



What is Frequency Hopping? Frequency Hopping (FH) is a spreading technique that hasits carrier signal changing its frequency many times asecond in a pseudo-random pattern making it multipathresist. If a particular frequency runs into interference or ahigh level of noise, the device “hops” to the otherfrequencies less likely to be affected to continue thetransmission.

Interference is reduced because radio signal is constantlymoving (changing frequency) during the transmission ofdata. Two separate wireless networks with frequencyhopping techniques can co-exist in the same environment.The “hopping sequence” is specified by the network ID.

Here is an example of Frequency Hopping:

The FH signal is transmitted over a wide frequency band of2.4-2.4835 Ghz. The maximum data rate for the 2.4Ghzfrequency hopping is 2Mbps. Use FH if you have a highradio frequency multipath environment.



What is Direct Sequence? Direct Sequence (DS) is a spreading technique that remainsat a fixed frequency. The signal is transmitted over a widefrequency range and low amplitude. This allows for filteringout sharp high amplitude interference.

Here is an example direct sequence:

The data transmitted through direct sequence is multipliedto add redundancy to the signal. The signal redundancyenables reconstruction of data if a portion of the frequencyspectrum is knocked out by interference. This redundancyresults in a processing gain and provides for a successfultransmission at higher data rates. Use DS if you want to thedata to be sent with greater coverage and greaterthroughput.

Frequency Protocols Each provider has its own protocol or internal way oftransmitting frequencies through a network.• Telxon/Aironet’s proprietary protocol is TMA• Symbol’s proprietary protocol is 802.3

Another frequency protocol, 802.11, can be used by Telxon,Aironet, and Symbol. The 802.11 frequency protocol is thestandard developed by the industry enabling provider’s tocommunicate with each other in a network.

☛ Note

In order to use 802.11, all providers must use the samefrequency spreading technique (Frequency Hopping orDirect Sequence).



Setting Up WirelessCommunication

To set up wireless communication you need the following:(From a supported supplier)

• Access Point• PC Network Card• Antenna

(Included in Hobart wireless kit)• PC Adapter Board• Operating Code• Extra RAM (if needed)• Hardware

What is an Access Point? The Access Point (AP) acts as a root unit and controls trafficflow to the network. It attaches to the backbone, which is thephysical wired Ethernet or Token Ring connection. Itcontains configuration information in its association tablethat covers all stations in the communication system. TheAP is the point at which scales or other devices can accessthe backbone and communicate with all wireless devices ina cell area.

An access point can be added to extend the coverage rangeof the service area. Add multiple AP to cover a larger area.The AP coverage range depends on data rates beingtransferred. The higher the data rates the smaller thecoverage range.

You can set up several system configurations in aninfrastructure depending how you use your access points.An infrastructure is a communication system that combinesaccess points, mobile stations and fixed stations. Refer toyour provider’s manual for more information on systemconfigurations in an infrastructure.



What is a PC Network Cardand Adapter Board?

A PC Network Card is attached to the PC adapter board andinserted into every scale in the wireless network. You need awireless PC network card and PC adapted board in eachscale to communicate within the network.

The PC Network card must be configured to determine ifthe scale is connected in the network. Refer to Configuring theNetwork Card on the next page.

☛ Note

Contact your Hobart Service Representative for properinstallation.

Using an Antenna Antennas help to maximize radio communication range in acoverage area. Choosing the right antenna depends uponthe environment and the application. Knowing yourenvironment can help you determine the right antenna andplacement. Once you become familiar with the environmentand coverage area at your site, choose an antenna with acoverage area that best matches your sites coverage area.

Antennas are either Omni-directional or Directional.• Omni-directional antennas are ideal for square or

somewhat square areas because they have a 360°coverage pattern on a horizontal plane. The coveragearea is doughnut-shaped. Place the antenna in the centerof the coverage area whenever possible.

• Directional antennas are ideal for elongated areas,corners, and outdoor point-to-point applications becausethey have a single direction coverage area on a verticalplane (like a flashlight). The beam width angles are from90° (somewhat directional) to 20° (very directional). Theantenna reaches a longer and more direct coverage areawhen the beam is narrower. Point the antenna at thedirection of the coverage area.

Proper positioning of antennas is important to ensure youare using the maximum coverage area. Generally, antennasshould be positioned so they are clear of obstructions. Thebest performance coverage is achieved if the transmittingand receiving antennas are located at the same height andare in direct line of sight of each other.

For more information on antennas, refer to your provider’smanual.



Configuring WirelessTCP/IP Networks

Wireless TCP/IP operates the same as hardwired TCP/IPexcept wire is replaced with radio connection. Refer toChapter 13; Setting Up TCP/IP Networks to configure andsetup your wireless network, and Testing the TCP/IPConnection/PING to determine if you are communicate withother scales in your wireless network.

The only additions to using wireless TCP/IP are configuringthe Network Card and performing a Signal Strength MeterTest. Also, you can add up to nineteen (19) client scales to adepartment in an IntraNet Configuration using wirelessTCP/IP.

☛ Note

The screen display varies depending on the supportedsupplier that you choose.

Configuring the NetworkCard

Once the IP Addresses are set up, you must configure thenetwork card to set up the System ID and determine if thescale is connected. Both the Access Point and Scale System IDmust be the same.

Spectrum 24, Spectrum802.11, and Telxon/Aironet802.11

To configure the network card:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.2. PRESS [F6] to select Communications Menu.3. PRESS [F2] to select Network.4. PRESS [F5] to select Configure Network Card.

5. Enter the System ID. This must be a numeric value andmust be the same as the Access Point System ID. It maybe referred to as “Network ID”. The default is 101.



☛ Note

The system ID and access point use a hex (“H”) value. Hexis an alphanumeric value.

At this time, the network card system ID uses 16 identifiers(0-9 and A-F) and can accept a hex value with 4 digits(e.g. AA22). Yet, the 802.11 access point system ID canaccept an alphanumeric value up to 32 characters. You mustchange your access point system ID to a 4-digit hex valuethat matches the network card system ID, if applicable.

6. PRESS [ESC].7. PRESS [F5] again to select Configure Network Card.8. Verify that the screen displays “Connected”. This

indicates the scale is connected to an Access Point andcan communicate within the network.

☛ Note

If “Disconnected” displays on the Network Card Screen tryany of the following:

• Verify the Access point and Scale “System ID” are the same.

• Make sure you reset the scale after you entered the scalesconfiguration settings on the TCP/IP Network Screen.

• Verify all the TCP/IP setting are correct. If you change anything, reset the scale.

• Relocate the scale closer to the Access Point or relocate the Access Point.

• Reposition the antenna on the Access Point or the scale ifan external antenna is installed.

9. After entering the System ID, PRESS [ESC] to return tothe TCP/IP Network Screen.



Telxon/Aironet 2.4 To configure the network card:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


5. Enter the System ID. This must be a numeric value andmust be the same as the Access Point System ID. It maybe referred to as “Network ID”. The default is 102.

☛ Note


At this time, the network card system ID uses 16 identifiers(0-9 and A-F) and can accept a hex value with 4 digits(e.g. AA22). Yet, the Telxon/Aironet 2.4 access point systemID can accept a 6-digit hex value. You must change youraccess point system ID to a 4-digit hex value that matchesthe network card system ID, if applicable.



6. Enter the Frequency channel. This must be the same asthe Access Point Frequency channel.

7. Enter the Bit Rate channel. This must be the same as theAccess Point Bit Rate channel. Bit Rate is the speed thatthe data is transmitting.

☛ Note

Channels may need to be changed if there is an interferencebecause another device is on the same frequency or bit ratechannel. Contact your Hobart Service Technician to changethe Frequency or Bit Rate channels.



☛ Note










Telxon/Aironet 900 To configure the network card:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


5. Enter the System ID. This must be a numeric value andmust be the same as the Access Point System ID. It maybe referred to as “Network ID”.

☛ Note


At this time, the network card system ID uses 16 identifiers(0-9 and A-F) and can accept a hex value with 4 digits(e.g. AA22). Yet, the Telxon/Aironet 900 access point systemID can accept a 6-digit hex value. You must change youraccess point system ID to a 4-digit hex value that matchesthe network card system ID, if applicable.



6. Enter the Frequency channel. This must be the same asthe Access Point Frequency channel.

☛ Note

Channels may need to be changed if there is an interferencebecause another device is on the same frequency or bit ratechannel. Contact your Hobart Service Technician to changethe Frequency.



☛ Note










Signal Strength MeterTest

The Signal Strength Meter test is used to check the radioconnection and how it is effected by the radio traffic andradio signal strength. It indicates how many pings andresponses occur within a specific time frame based on themaximum that can occur.

To test the signal strength:1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale

Setup Menu.2. PRESS [F6] to select Communication Menu.3. PRESS [F2] to select Network.4. PRESS [F6] to select Link Quality

5. Enter the Access Point IP Address.6. PRESS [F2] to select Start Link Test.

☛ Note

You may not be prompted to enter an Access Point IPAddress depending on the type of network card you areusing.• If you do need to enter an Access Point IP Address, the

Link Quality Screen will reflect relative time.• If you do not need to enter an Access Point IP address,

the Link Quality Screen will reflect true signal strength.



7. Refer to the strength meter indicator to determine howmany pings and responses occurred within a specifictime frame.

8. PRESS [F2] to stop the Link Test.

☛ Note

If the signal strength is poor try any of the following:• Check for interference between the Access Point and the

Scale.• Relocate your antenna, if possible.• Relocate the scale closer to the Access Point.

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the TCP/IP Network Screen.


A - 1 Appendix

Appendix

♦ Understanding Network Configurations• What Does Client and Server Really Mean?• ScaleMaster• IntraNet• ScaleMaster/IntraNet• MiniNet II

♦ Understanding Ethernet Networks• Hubs• Wiring• Crossover Function• TCP/IP – Troubleshooting IP Addresses

♦ Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration• EAN13 Barcode Examples

♦ Understanding the Text Editor♦ Marquee Editor♦ Creating Macro (Using the Save/Recall Key)

• Executing a Macro• Deleting a Macro

♦ Proportional Tare (Percentage Tare)♦ Percentage Tare Procedures♦ How the Percentage Tare Value is Calculated♦ Hobart Recommended Class Structure♦ Quantum Function Codes♦ Operator Access Levels


Appendix A - 2

UnderstandingNetworkConfigurations

The Quantum Scale System can be set with the followingnetworking configurations:♦ None♦ Scalemaster♦ IntraNet♦ ScaleMaster/Intranet♦ MiniNet

The following pages detail the differences between thesenetworking systems. However, before you get to that, let’stake a look at the terms Server Scale and Client Scale.

What Does Client & ServerReally Mean?

There are three (3) “senses” to understanding how a scaleacts as a “Server” Scale. From the ScaleMaster standpoint,the Server Scale is any scale connected to ScaleMaster andIntraNet as well as other scales in the department. Keep inmind, there is no setting in the software to designate a scaleas a server. Any scale that receives data from ScaleMasterwill attempt to send that data to scales connected viaIntraNet. Therefore, it is important to connect only one (1)scale to ScaleMaster per department.

The second way a scale acts like a “Server” is for Totalscollection. Again, note the scale itself does not know that itis a server. Other scales are configured to send their Totalsto it. Within a given department, some scales could sendtheir Totals to Scale ID x, others to Scale ID y, and others notto send Totals at all. (This is done by sending their ownScale ID or Scale ID 0.) All of this is independent of whichscale is connected to ScaleMaster; however, it is of greateradvantage for the scale connected to ScaleMaster to bedesignated as the server.

The third way a scale can be designated as the Server Scaleis when you make a change and it looks for all otherdepartment scales to where it should send the data. Also theServer Scale compares its database to a client scale when theclient scale is reset. If the client scale’s database is differentfrom the server scale, the server scale database is loadedonto the client scale to include the updated data. Ensureyour server has an active database before you reset anyclient scale.

Now, let’s take a look at the descriptions of the variousnetwork configurations.


A - 3 Appendix

ScaleMaster ScaleMaster is a powerful data management tool for multi-department, multi-scale operations. However with theQuantum, it becomes even more powerful.

ScaleMaster sends the required database changes from acentralized location directly to each scale configured in theScaleMaster network. Data can also be retrieved from eachscale. Refer to your ScaleMaster manual for more detailedinformation.

IntraNet IntraNet is an acronym for Intradepartment Network. It isinternal to the scale software and combines the functionalityof ScaleMaster with an enhanced MiniNet II network byconnecting the data of all the scales in the department. Thismeans improved performance and convenience for you.

Assume you have five (5) scales in a department. If youmake a change to “user data” (i.e., PLU data, label types,flashkeys, etc.) at Scale #1, through IntraNet that changewill update immediately or at a predetermined time stampScales 2-5 in the department. When the update is successful,a transmission message appears on the screen the next timeyou enter the Supervisor Mode.

In this way, you have a peer-to-peer network in the sensethat any scale you make changes on becomes the “server”scale and all other scales become “clients.”


Appendix A - 4

If the data transmission is unsuccessful, this same windowwill alert you with an error message.

☛ Note

The following screen may appear alerting you to the factthat background tasks are running. This message tells youthat the scale is attempting to send data to other scales overIntraNet. You will not be able to complete theBackup/Restore function until the data transfer is complete.


A - 5 Appendix

ScaleMaster/IntraNet ScaleMaster and IntraNet configuration saves time andmoney when transferring data between scale locationsbecause you are not communicating with all the scales in allthe departments. You only have to communicate with onescale (Server Scale). The Server Scale then has responsibilityfor updating all the other scales in the department.

Before you get to the explanation of how the data istransferred, let’s review a couple of terms.

Term Definition

Server Scale A designated department scale connectedto both ScaleMaster and IntraNet (intra-department network).

Client Scale This is a scale or numerous scales thatconnect to the Server Scale via IntraNet.

Look At This

Make sure ScaleMaster is not configured to communicatewith the client scales.

Sending Data to the Scales To update a scale, ScaleMaster sends the required databasechanges to the Server Scale. This scale then sends the sameinformation down to the Client Scales connected in itsdepartment network. If while sending these changes to theClient Scales in its department, ScaleMaster then sends otherinformation to the Server Scale, the Server Scale stopssending information to the Client Scales and accepts theadditional transmission from ScaleMaster. Once thistransmission is completed, the Server Scale again attemptsto send the previous changes, followed by the new changes,in chronological order, to the scales in the departmentnetwork.

Reading Data from the Scales In addition to sending data to the scales, ScaleMaster alsoallows you to retrieve information from the Server Scale.Totals data is sent from the Client Scales and stored in theServer Scales database. In other words, each Client Scale inthe department sends Totals information back to the ServerScale after each transaction. The Server Scale adds thesevalues into its Totals file. The Server Scale totals then reflectthe Totals for the department. When ScaleMaster asks forTotals information, it receives Totals for the wholedepartment, not just for the Server Scale.


Appendix A - 6

MiniNet II The MiniNet II networking function allows each departmentto be setup as its own individual network informationexchange. However, contrary to IntraNet, the changes donot take place automatically. You must designate when thechanges occur. A detailed explanation of how to BackUp orRestore Data through MiniNet II, is found in the BackUp orRestore section.

UnderstandingEthernet Networks

To effectively set up Scales with TCP/IP, you should have abasic understanding of Ethernet networking. A NetworkConsultant or Network Administrator should be contactedprior to implementing an Ethernet LAN system.

Hubs Hubs for 10BaseT are available with different numbers andtypes of ports. The IEEE 802.3 standard recommends that thesignal crossover function for 10BaseT connection is doneinside the hub port. This standard also notes that all portsfeaturing an internal crossover be designated with an "X".Some hubs provide a port where the crossover function iscontrolled by a switch. This port is generally used forcascading hubs using straight through cables. Hubs whereall ports feature an internal crossover generally require acrossover cable to cascade the hubs. Stackable hubs, whichprovide a special connection for stacking two (2) or morehubs, are also available. Stacked hubs count as one hubwhen calculating the number of hubs and segments betweentwo stations.

☛ Note

10BaseT hubs are also available with connections forattaching to a 10Base2 (coax cable) network.

Wiring An Ethernet network may consist of several different cabletypes. ScaleMaster may be used successfully with any typeof Ethernet network if provisions are made to provide a10BaseT connection for each scale. Refer to your ScaleMasterTCP/IP Supplement for more information (F-33863).

Wiring Specifications10BaseT (or UTP-Unshielded Twisted Pair) length segmentshave a maximum of 328ft (100m). This is the maximumamount allowed between hubs or remote devices (i.e. scalesor computers). The network is also restricted to a maximumof four (4) hubs between any two devices.


A - 7 Appendix

Wiring CategoriesHobart Ethernet scales supporting TCP/IP require a networkconnection using 10BaseT wiring. Hobart recommends thatall wiring conform to Category 3 or 5 standards, publishedby EIA.

☛ Note

Category 3 wiring may be used but is not recommended.

Look At This

All wiring and cabling must be installed to meet Nationaland Local Electrical Codes.

All Ethernet wiring must conform to IEEE 802.3specifications.

All cabling should be installed to meet the cabling pathwayrequirements of EIA/TIA Standard 569, table 4.8-5.

Crossover Function Two Ethernet 10BaseT devices can only communicate if thetransmitter on one device is connected to the receiver on theother device. When connecting two identical 10BaseT ports(ports that either both support the crossover function or bothdo not support the crossover function), the crossoverfunction must be implemented in the wiring.

Patch Cord WiringA patch cord is the connecting cable between two pieces ofhardware on an ethernet network. The recommendedstandard for wiring patch cords is the EIA/TIA 568Bstandard, using RJ-45 8 conductor connectors. The patchcords used may be wired to any standard as long as all cordsare wired using the same standard. The EIA/TIA 568Bstandard is recommended for conformity with industrystandards.


Appendix A - 8

Straight Thru Patch Cord A straight thru patch cord has both ends wired the same andis generally used to connect computers to the hub and toconnect devices to hubs. Depending on the hub a straightthru patch cord or crossover patch cord may be required tocascade hubs. Refer to the documentation provided by themanufacturer of your hub.

10 Base - T Straight Thru Patch Cord

Pin Color Signal

1 White/orange TX data +

2 Orange/white TX data -

3 White/green RX data +

4 Blue --

5 White/blue --

6 Green/white RX data -

7 White/brown --

8 Brown --


A - 9 Appendix

Crossover Patch Cord A crossover patch cord is generally used to cascade hubs. Acrossover patch cord has one end wired as a straight thruconnection and the other end wired as a crossoverconnection. Depending on the hub, a straight thru patchcord, or a crossover patch cord may be required to cascadehubs. Refer to the documentation provided by themanufacturer of your hub.

10 Base - T Crossover Patch Cord

Pin Color Signal

1 White/green RX data +

2 Green/white RX data -

3 White/orange TX data +

4 Blue --

5 White/blue --

6 Orange/white TX data -

7 White/brown --

8 Brown --


Appendix A - 10

Wiring Identification As part of the Hobart recommended cable identificationscheme, all ethernet hubs should be marked with a uniquehub number. All ethernet patch cords should be marked atboth ends with the originating hub and port number and thedestination hub and port number. Refer to the followingexample.


A - 11 Appendix

TCP/IP - Troubleshooting IPAddresses

The following section contains information to help youtroubleshoot problems within your configuration. Thereferences give you items to troubleshoot, tools to use whiletroubleshooting, and messages to look for when you aretroubleshooting. This section is only for systems equippedwith TCP/IP Communications.

Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action

TCP/IP: Connecterror, check IPAddressconfiguration.

Invalid IP Addressconfigured for thescale.

Compare the IP Address in the scale to the IP Address, whichyou configured in ScaleMaster. These addresses should match.

TCP/IP: Couldnot talk to scale.Check withNetworkAdministrator.

Somethingterminated theconnection betweenthe scale andScaleMaster.

Check with your Network Administrator.

TCP/IP: Couldnot disconnect.System time-outoccurred.

After a successfulconnection, thedisconnect from thescale failed.

Check with your Network Administrator. This is a network-related problem.

TCP/IP devicenot installed(PathWayRuntime stack).

Invalid componentsinstalled.

Check PathWay Runtime installation against Hobartrecommended installation. (This is a ScaleMaster component.Contact your Network Administrator for details.)

TCP/IP sockettable full, nosockets available(no buffer space).

TCP/IP stack out ofresource.

Increase packet buffer sizes in PathWay Runtime installation.This can be done through the Advanced Configuration Setupavailable in PathWay Runtime. (This is a ScaleMastercomponent. Contact your Network Administrator for details.)

TCP/IP socket isalreadyconnected.

ScaleMaster is tryingto connect to a scalethat is alreadyconnected.

Wait 30 seconds for the scale to time out and retry the operation.

TCP/IP could notestablish socket,check IP andnetwork.

Invalid IP Addressconfigured or the PCis not connected tothe ethernet network.

Verify the IP Address in the scale against the IP Address, whichyou configured in ScaleMaster. The numbers should match.--OR--Check your network connection.--OR--Verify that Well Know Port setting in the uiconf.txt file matchesthe scale (ScaleMaster uses 6000).

TCP/IPconnectionrefused, checkcables/ports/IPAddress.

The scale hasexhausted all of itssockets.

Give the scale 1-minute to regain its resources.

There are nomore available IPAddresses

All of the IPAddresses availablein the network havebeen used.

Contact your Network Administrator.


Appendix A - 12

Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action

TCP/IP: The scaleaborted thecommunicationstask.

The scaleencountered a criticalerror duringcommunication andaborted the task.

View the Activities that were Attempted Screen concerning thecommunication error. (This is a ScaleMaster component. Contactyour Network Administrator for details.)

The scale is out ofmemory.

The scale does nothave enough memoryavailable to processany new data.

Free memory available in the scale (i.e., delete totals, addmemory, delete unused PLUs, etc.).

Ethernet Card

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action

Link light onethernet card noton. (If the card isequipped withlights.)

A cable isdisconnected and/ordamaged.

Verify cable connections and integrity. The link light onlyfunctions for the RJ-45 connector. If the card has a BNCconnector and the connector is in use, the link light may notlight.

You receivesystem errormessages duringboot.

There areconfigurationproblems.

Verify the correct drivers are being used. Consult the ethernetcards documentation and perform the card diagnostics providedby the manufacturer.

The systemcannotcommunicate.

The connections toboth the BNC andRJ-45 connectors.

Some manufacturers of ethernet adapters provide connector forboth BNC and RJ-45 connections. If the card has both connectorsin use, generally the RJ-45 connection takes precedence. Consultthe manufacturers documentation for specific information.

Hub to Scale


Both the scaleand hub linklights are off orflashing.

• A cable isdisconnectedand/or damaged.

• Verify cable connections and cable integrity.

• It is the incorrectcable and/or anincorrectly wiredcable.

• Verify the correct cable is being used for the port in use at thehub (Straight Through or Crossover, depending onconfiguration). Verify the plug wiring at both ends.

• No power to huband/or scale.

• Verify that the hub and/or scale is connected to theappropriate power source.

Both the scaleand hub linklights are off orflashing.

The hub switchsetting is incorrect.

Verify that the hub crossover switch is set correctly. (Not allhubs have switches.)


A - 13 Appendix

Hub to Scale (continued)


The scale linklight is off.

• A cable isdisconnectedand/or damaged.

• Verify cable connections and cable integrity.

• It is the incorrectcable.

• Verify that a crossover cable is used if connecting to two portsmarked with an "X" (internal crossover).

• Verify that a straight through cable is used if connecting to aport on one hub marked with an "X" (internal crossover).

• The RJ-45 plugpins 3 & 6 arewired incorrectly.

• Verify the wiring at both ends.

• No power to scale. • Verify that scale is connected to the appropriate powersource.

• Defective port onhub.

• Connect scale to a different port and recheck link light.

• The scale board isdefective.

• Replace board. Prior to replacing the board, connect the scalein place of a scale that is working and recheck link light.

Hub link light isoff or flashing.

A cable isdisconnected and/ordamaged.

Verify cable connections and cable integrity.

Hub link light isoff or flashing.(continued)

• There is no powerto the hub.

• Verify that the hub is connected to the appropriate powersource.

• It is the incorrectcable.



• The RJ-45 plugpins 1 & 2 arewired incorrectly.

• Verify the wiring at both ends.

• The hub switchsetting.

• Verify that the hub crossover switch is set correctly. (Not allhubs have switches.) Refer to Understanding ScaleMasterEthernet Networks.

• A defective port onthe hub and/or adefective hub.

• Connect scale to a different port and recheck link light.

• The scale board isdefective.

• Replace board. Prior to replacing the board, connect the scalein place of a working scale and recheck link light.


Appendix A - 14

Hub to Hub


The link lights onboth hubs are offor flashing.

• It is an incorrectcable.



• There is no powerto hub(s).

• Verify that the hub(s) are connected to the appropriate powersource.

The polarity light(POL) on scale ison.

The polarity isincorrect.

Verify cable wiring. The Polarity light indicates that the polarityis reversed in a RJ-45 plug between pins 3 & 6 in the cable fromthe scale to the hub.

The collisionlight (COL) onthe scale is on.

Multiple devices aretrying tocommunicate at thesame time.

Contact the system administrator.

The partitionlight on the scaleis on.

There arewiring/deviceproblem(s).

Remove power from the hub. Wait 30 seconds and reconnect. Ifthe partition light comes back on, troubleshoot the wiringattached to the indicated hub port. Look for bad wiring, EMFsources close to the wiring, and/or a device problem.

All TCP/IPscales are off-line.

There are computerproblem(s).

• Verify that all drivers are loading while the computer isbooting and that no error messages are displayed.

• Attempt to ping the computer using an IP of 127.0.0.1. If theping test fails, troubleshoot the ethernet adapter boardand/or the drivers.

• Attempt to ping the computer where ScaleMaster is installedfrom any other computer on the network.

• Initiate a ping test to any valid address. While the ping test isin progress, observe the activity light on the ethernet adapterboard, (it should be flashing). Also observe the RCV L.E.D.son the scales. The L.E.D.s should be flashing. If the L.E.D.flashes on the ethernet adapter, but not on the scales,troubleshoot the configuration and/or network wiring. If theL.E.D. on the ethernet adapter does not flash, troubleshootthe computer/adapter installation.


A - 15 Appendix

Hub to Hub (continued)


All TCP/IPscales are off-line. (continued)

• There areconfigurationproblem(s).

• Verify that the Well-Known Port setting in Uiconf.txt matchesthe Well-Known Port setting in the scales (ScaleMaster uses6000).

• Verify that the scale IP Addresses match the IP Addressesconfigured in ScaleMaster.

• Verify that the IP configured in PathWay Runtime is correctand that the correct subnet mask was specified.

• There are wiringproblem(s).

• Verify that all cables are connected.

• Verify that all link lights are on at the hubs and at the scales.

• Disconnect all scales from the network and attempt tocommunicate with each scale after reconnecting.

• Verify that the scale network has not been partitioned by theethernet hub.

Some scales areon-line and oneor more scalesare off line.

• The scaleconfiguration isincorrect.

• Verify the scale network configuration.

• Verify that each scale has a unique IP Address.

• Verify the status of the scales ethernet L.E.D.s for link, polarity,and collision.

• Verify the scale has the correct Well-Known Port (ScaleMasteruses 6000).

• There are wiringproblem(s).

• Verify that all cables are connected on the affected segments.

• Verify that all link lights are on at the hubs and at the scales.

• Verify that the scale network has not been partitioned by theethernet hub.

• There are hubproblem(s).

• If all the scales that are off-line are connected to one hub,troubleshoot the hub.


Appendix A - 16

Understanding EAN13Scale Configuration

The EAN13 configuration consists of 12 characters whichrepresent the data printed in each position of the barcode.

Discuss with your Hobart Representative how you want toset up Random Weight, Fixed Weight, and By CountConfigurations. Refer to the following table for anexplanation of which data is represented by whichcharacter, and the maximum number of positions availablefor the data. Refer to the following rules to understand howyour configuration is set up.

CharacterSymbol

Description Max.Digits

X Prefix Digit 2

W Weight 5

w Weight Check Digit 1

P Price 5

p Price Check Digit 1

E EAN Code 9

N Product Number 6

V Vendor Number 6

Q By Count Quantity 2

☛ Note

The first character in the format string is always an X for thenumber system or a fixed digit from 0-9. If the first characterin the format string is X, you can set a default prefix numberfor a custom label type in Supervisor Mode. Refer to Settingthe EAN13 Default Prefix for PLUs in chapter 12.


A - 17 Appendix

Any combination of characters can be used for theremaining eleven characters, however they must complywith the following rules:

• Any data field, with the exception of fixed numbers,must be continuous.

• The Price check digit ‘p’ is only allowed if there is a pricefield of 4 or 5 digits entered before or after the pricecheck digit.

• The weight check digit ‘w’ will only be allowed if thereis a weight field of 4 to 5 digits entered before or afterthe weight check digit.

• If the value of the weight or total price for a transactionexceeds the number of digits configured, no EAN barcode is printed for the transaction.

• If the value of the EAN code is larger than the number ofdigits configured then the right most digits aretruncated.

• If the value of the EAN code is shorter than the numberof digits configured, the EAN code is padded withleading zeros.

• No format string is allowed to incorporate both an EANcode ‘E’ field and either a vendor number ‘V’ field orproduct number ‘N’ field.

• If during download of a database from an external serialdevice the prefix is not sent and this is a new PLU, thenthe default EAN prefix is used based on the PLU typeand the presence of prefix digits in the correspondingformat string.

EAN13 Barcode Examples Refer to the following examples for EAN13 barcodes.Remember, the last digit is always the check digit. In theexamples these character symbols are used.

X = Prefix DigitW = Weightw = Weight Check DigitP = Pricep = Price Check DigitE = EAN CodeN = Product NumberV = Vendor NumberQ = By Count QuantityS = Scale IDC = Check Digit


Appendix A - 18

EAN13 Methods

WEIGHT

X E E E E E E W W W W W C1 Prefix Digit6 EAN Code5 Weight1 Check Digit

X X E E E E E E W W W W C2 Prefix Digit6 EAN Code4 Weight1 Check Digit

X X E E E E E W W W W W C2 Prefix Digit5 EAN Code5 Weight1 Check Digit

X X E E E E E w W W W W C2 Prefix Digit5 EAN Code1 Weight Check Digit4 Weight1 Check Digit


A - 19 Appendix

PRICE

X E E E E E E P P P P P C1 Prefix Digit6 EAN Code5 Price1 Check Digit

X X E E E E E E P P P P C2 Prefix Digit6 EAN Code4 Price1 Check Digit

X X E E E E E P P P P P C2 Prefix Digit5 EAN Code5 Price1 Check Digit

X X E E E E E p P P P P C2 Prefix Digit5 EAN Code1 Price Check Digit4 Price1 Check Digit

VENDOR/PRODUCT NUMBER

X V V V V V V N N N N N C1 Prefix Digit6 Vendor Number5 Product Number1 Check Digit

BY COUNT

X X E E E E Q Q P P P P C2 Prefix Digit4 EAN Code2 By Count Quantity4 Price1 Check Digit


Appendix A - 20

Understanding theText Editor

Within some functions, you have the ability to change thetext field. From the Text Editor you can add or edit thefollowing:

♦ Description of a product or Flashkey♦ Operator Name♦ Special Messages♦ Expanded Text

To access the Text Editor from all accessible functions,PRESS the Change Text Field Softkey. A screen similar tothe one below displays.

Once you are on the Text Editor Screen, there are severaloptions for what you can do with the text. Each selectionwill be discussed in the following paragraphs.


A - 21 Appendix

(F1) Select Font Select Font allows you to change the font and size of theText field.

To Change the Font and/or Size of text:

1. Position the cursor where you want to begin markingtext. (See the explanation for Mark Text.)

2. PRESS [F2] to select Mark.3. Use the Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the end of the

text. The marked text will be highlighted.4. PRESS [F1] to access Select Font. The current font is

shown in < >.

5. PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to select the font orPRESS [F8] to view More Fonts. PRESS the “F” Key toselect the new font.

6. You may continue making changes to the text.


Appendix A - 22

(F2) Mark Text Select Mark Text to define blocks of text that can quickly becopied modified or deleted from the record.

To Mark Text for editing:

1. Position the cursor before the text you want to Mark.2. PRESS [F2] to select Mark.

3. Use the Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the end of thetext block. The marked text will be highlighted.

✎ Tip

To quickly mark a whole line of text:

1. Place the cursor at the beginning of the line.2. PRESS [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to select the entire text

line.


A - 23 Appendix

(F3) Cut Text Cut Text allows you to remove text from the position it is in,usually to delete it. Once you cut the text, it can be copied toanother location.

1. Position the cursor where you want to begin markingtext.


text. The marked text will be highlighted.

4. PRESS [F3] to select Cut and remove the text.


Appendix A - 24

(F4) Paste Text The Paste Text function allows you to move or copy a blockof text from one position to another.



text. The marked text will be highlighted.

4. PRESS [F3] to select Cut and remove the text.


A - 25 Appendix

5. Use the Arrow Keys to place the cursor in the positionwhere you want to paste the text.

6. To insert the text, PRESS [F4] to Paste.

☛ Note

When you edit text, the Editor fits the text in the fieldspecified by the label. The auto-wrap feature enables you touse the expanded text in a different label with a differentsized field.

(F5) Copy Text The Copy Text function allows you to copy a block of textfrom one position to another.


2. PRESS [F2] to select Mark.


Appendix A - 26

3. Use the Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the end of thetext. The marked text will be highlighted.

4. PRESS [F5] to select Copy.

5. Use the Arrow Keys to place the cursor in the positionwhere you want to copy the text.

6. To insert the text, PRESS [F4] to Paste.


A - 27 Appendix

Marquee Editor Marquee Messages can be created for each PLU within yourdatabase. In addition to text, the Marquee Message can bedisplayed to draw your customer’s attention to the display.Use the following commands to setup your merchandisingstrategy.

“F” Command Purpose

F1 - Scroll This function moves each character inthe text group from right to left acrossthe display.

F2 - Frame This function displays the text group in afixed position.

F3 - Blink On/BlinkOff

The Blink On/Blink Off toggle blinks thetext group (entire message or a specificpart of the message) at 1 blink persecond.

F4 - Clear The Clear function clears the displaywhen changing from the Frame to theScroll mode.

F5 - Hold In the Scroll mode, this command freezesthe display for 1 second. In the Framemode, it adds 1 second to the displaytime.

F6 - Roll This command rolls the message off tothe left before displaying additionalinformation.

F7 - Scroll/FrameSpeed

When in the Scroll mode, you can choosefrom the following speeds:♦ Slow - 2 Characters/Second♦ Normal - 3 Characters/Second♦ Quick - 4 Characters/Second♦ XQuick - 5 Characters/Second

When in the Frame mode, you canchoose from the following speeds:♦ Slow - 2 Seconds/Frame♦ Normal - 1.5 Seconds/Frame♦ Quick - 1 Second/Frame♦ XQuick - .5 Second/Frame

F8 - Start/StopMarquee Test

This function allows you to start or stopthe Marquee Message preview thatdisplays on the Control Panel.


Appendix A - 28

Creating Macros(Using the Save/RecallKey)

In order to speed your operation of the scale, you can createmacros by recording in advance, commonly or frequentlyused keystrokes. Basically, you record the series ofkeystrokes one time and then execute (i.e., playback) themacro as often as needed to perform the operation.

For example, you may want to print a specific range ofPLU’s during the Print Product List function. You can assignthe “function” a Macro Number and then record thekeystrokes to perform the operation. When you want toexecute the Macro, all you have to do is PRESS[SAVE/RECALL] and enter the Macro Number. Detailedinstructions on recording, executing and deleting Macrosare on the following pages.

☛ Note

You can record or execute a Supervisor Macro from theSupervisor Menu only.

Recording a Macro

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. Position Cursor2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]3. TYPE the Macro Number4. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]5. TYPE the Macro Name6. PRESS [F1]7. Enter the keystrokes to

Record Macro8. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]9. PRESS [SUPER MENU

ON/OFF]

To record a Macro:

1. You should be on the Supervisor Menu.2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]. You should now be on the

Supervisor Macros Screen.

3. TYPE the Macro Number.4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Macro Name field.5. If desired, TYPE the Macro Name.


A - 29 Appendix

6. PRESS [F1] to start recording the Macro.

7. PRESS the keys required. The PLU records and thekeystrokes are recorded to be replayed or executed later.

8. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL] to complete the Macro.9. PRESS [SUPER MENU ON/OFF] to return to the

Supervisor Menu.

Executing a Macro

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. Position Cursor2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]3. TYPE the Macro Number4. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]5. PRESS [F3]6. PRESS [SUPER MENU

ON/OFF]

To execute a Macro:


Supervisor Macros Screen.3. TYPE the Macro Number.4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Macro Name field and confirm the Macro Name.5. PRESS [F3] to select Execute. After you press [F3], the

scale will move through the Macro sequence and stop.

6. When you have completed the operation, PRESS [SUPERMENU ON/OFF] to return to the Supervisor Menu.


Appendix A - 30

☛ Note

An error message during the Execute function terminates theMacro.

Deleting a Macro

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:1. Position Cursor2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]3. TYPE the Macro Number4. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]5. PRESS [F5]6. Repeat Steps 3 - 5 (If

desired)7. PRESS [ESC]

To delete a Macro:


Supervisor Macros Screen.3. TYPE the Macro Number.4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to

the Macro Name field and confirm the Macro Name.5. PRESS [F5] to select Delete. The Macro is immediately

deleted.6. If desired, repeat Steps 3 - 5 to delete other Macros.7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note

You can access Supervisor Macros from the SupervisorMenu only.

Proportional Tare(Percentage Tare)

☛ Note

The following explanation on Percentage Tare (i.e.,Proportional Tare) comes from Weights & Measures Today,National Conference on Weights and Measures, November1993.


A - 31 Appendix

Percentage Tare Procedure The procedure used to compute net weight involves thedetermination of two (2) tare weights. One tare will be afixed tare for the outer container; the second, a percentagetare for individual wrappers on the items.

The store (or product manufacturer) determines thepercentage of the gross weight represented by the tareweight on one (1) pound of the wrapped candy (scales withmetric units would follow similar procedures).

For example, a pound of wrapped chocolate drops isunwrapped and the percentage tare weight determined on asuitable scale (e.g., on a scale with a minimum increment of0.002 lb.) to be 0.04 pound or 4%. In some stores, similarproducts such as wrapped candy of different flavors andtypes are offered for sale at the same price; in these cases,consumers can mix the different candies in the samepackage. Tare weights can vary slightly on each type ofcandy, so tare averaging may be used to establish apercentage tare value. Once determined, the percentage tareis programmed into the device with the PLU of the candy.

The fixed tare of the bag or other container used byconsumers is determined by the seller (e.g., 0.01 lb.) and iseither programmed into the device with the Price Look-UpCode (PLU) for wrapped chocolate drops or is manuallyentered into the cash register by the sales clerk during eachweighing process.

☛ Note

The following explanation on calculating the PercentageTare value is a portion of the Discussion Paper, The Use ofProportional Tare, Weights and Measures Industry Canada,June 22, 1994.

How the Percentage TareValue is Calculated

Percentage Tare value is the value expressed as a percentage(e.g. 5.6%, 2.3%, etc.), that represents the proportion of tarematerial in comparison with the gross weight of a commodity.For example, if the percentage tare value for a specificindividually wrapped confection is 14%, it means that for agross weight of 100 grams, the total weight of individualwrappers is 14 grams.

The percentage tare value (Proportional Tare) is the figure thatshould be used to calculate the proper tare to be used whenweighing individually wrapped confections (IWC).


Appendix A - 32

Here is an example illustrating how it is calculated. In order todetermine the net weight of candies, a fixed tare (weight of thecellophane bag and the twist tie) must first be deducted fromthe total gross weight.

Then, the weight of the individual wrappers must also bededucted. This weight is proportional to the number ofcandies in the bag. To determine this weight, two methods canbe used: 1) candies are unwrapped and the individualwrappers are weighed, or 2) it is calculated using thepercentage tare value (%T) and the gross weight.

The first method, which is a destructive method, should beused by the IWC manufacturers or importers to calculate thepercentage tare value applicable to their products. Thispercentage tare value should then be provided to retailers sothat they can use the second method which is non-destructive.

Method to be used by the manufacturer or importer fordetermining Percentage tare value (%T):

1) Ensure the scale is indicating zero (0).2) Select a minimum sample of 25 candies.3) Unwrap the candies, place the unwrapped candies aside

for further weighing, and weigh the wrappers. The totalweight of the wrappers must be at least ten times greaterthan the increment size (e.g. at least 20 grams if the scalehas 2 gram increments). If not, unwrap more candies andadd wrappers on the scale until the target weight isreached.

4) Record the total weight of the wrappers. This is the tareweight (TW).

5) Leave all the wrappers on the scale platter and add all thecandies that were unwrapped. Weigh all wrappers andcandies together and record this as the gross weight(GW).

6) Calculate the percentage tare value.

%T = TW x 100% GW

where:%T = Percentage Tare ValueTW = Tare WeightGW = Gross Weight


A - 33 Appendix

Hobart RecommendedClass Structure

☛ Note

The pages that follow are an excerpt from the Hobart PLUScales Product Look-Up Data Standards Workbook, F-2066 (R3-91). For the complete workbook, request Form 2066 (R3-91)from your local Hobart office.

Whenever an item is weighed on a Hobart PLU Scale, thetotal’s information (i.e., the number of packages, poundsand dollars weighed) are stored in the Scale’s memory.These totals are stored by individual items, but they can alsobe stored by groups of items, called Classes.

For example, in the meat department, the item file can beeasily grouped into major commodities such as BEEF,PORK, VEAL, etc. The major commodities can then begrouped into their primal cuts such as CHUCK, RIB, LOIN,GROUND, etc. This allows you to monitor major groups ofitems (classes), instead of having to monitor each individualitem.

The chart on the following pages shows the HobartRecommended Class Structure, including a detailedstructure for the Meat Department. The class descriptionshave been established in accordance with the UPC CouncilStandards, and the Class Numbers have been assignedusing PLU’s 009000-009989. (These numbers were chosenbecause not many retailers are using these upper levelnumbers as PLU’s in their own files.) The numbers anddescriptions can be changed as needed in order to customizethe file for each individual retailer, but this class systemshould be used in the absence of a preferred alternative.Other random weight departments should be structuredaccording to the needs of the department’s merchandisers.


Appendix A - 34


A - 35 Appendix


Appendix A - 36


A - 37 Appendix

Quantum FunctionCodes

In the event you want to move to a specific scale function,you can press the two-digit function code to move directlyto that operation without going through all the menus andscreens. The following chart is grouped by categories anddetails the function codes, the functions they select and theoperator access level associated with it.

ChangeProduct

Function Code Function Access Level

9 Batch Price Changes 410 All Fields 511 Unit Price 412 Delete Product/Class 513 Tare 514 Shelf Life 515 Class (Change a Reporting Class No. in

a PLU Record)5

16 Price Fields 517 Create/Edit a Class Record 518 Time Stamp Changes (Set a Date &

Time for changes to take effect)5

Totals Function Code Function Access Level

19 Collect Totals via MiniNet II 520 Configure Totals Types 721 Clear All Totals Records 722 Clear One Product’s Totals 723 Clear One Total’s Type for All PLU’s 724 Clear All Product Totals 725 Clear All Hourly Totals 726 Clear All Operator Totals 727 Void a Product’s Totals 728 Void an Operator’s Totals 729 Void an Hour’s Totals 740 View Product Totals 541 View Operator Totals 542 View Hourly Totals 5


Appendix A - 38

Scale Setup Function Code Function Access Level

30 Setup Flashkeys 338 Setup Marquee Message Modes 339 Setup Timed Marquee Messages 346 Select Special Fields to Print on a Label 947 Label Text Names 948 Label Information 949 Scale ID & Store Information 550 Setup Operator IDs 951 Set Cassette/Disk Parameters 752 Set Network Parameters 754 Set What the Operator Can Modify 755 Change Date & Time 356 Setup Normal Scale Operation 957 Graphics 558 Label Types 559 Itemized Labels 5

BackUp/Restore

Function Code Function Access Level

81 Restore from Diskette or Cassette 382 BackUp to Diskette or Cassette 383 Add Changes from Diskette or

Cassette3

84 Update Scales via MiniNet II 385 Update Changes via MiniNet II 386 Unmark Changed Items 387 Select Data to Transfer 588 Bad Record Scan 389 BackUp Changes to Diskette or

Cassette3

☛ Note

Creating Supervisor Macros requires Access Level 9.


A - 39 Appendix

Print Reports Function Code Function Access Level

60 Print All Product Totals 561 Print Product Totals by Range of PLU’s 562 Print All Operator Totals 563 Print All Hourly Totals 564 Print Hourly Totals by Range of Hours 565 Print All Totals Reports 566 Print All Product List 567 Print Product List by Range of PLU’s 568 Print Product Review - All 569 Print Product Review by Range of

PLU’s5

70 Print Flashkey Groups 371 Print Operator ID List 972 Print All Special Messages 373 Print Spec. Messages for a Range of

Spec. Messages3

74 Print All Expanded Text 375 Print Expanded Text for a Range of

Expanded Text3

76 Print All Marquee Messages 377 Print Marquee Messages for a Range of

Marquee Messages3

78 Print Configuration 779 Print Cutting Test Report 390 Print All Time Stamp Changes 591 Print Time Stamp Changes by PLU

Range5

92 Print Operator Changes 995 Print All Label Types 396 Print Labels Types by Range of Label

Types3

97 Print All Graphics 398 Print Graphics by Range of Graphics 3

Miscellaneous Function Code Function Access Level

43 Operator Changes 97 Delete Time Stamp Changes 937 View Network Communications

Report3


Appendix A - 40

Operator AccessLevels

The following chart is grouped by Access Level and detailsthe functions and function codes associated with each levelof access.

☛ Note

Remember, if you select an upper level access code, you canaccess all functions from lower levels.

Access Level 3 Function Code

Add Changes from Diskette or Cassette 83

Backup Changes to Diskette or Cassette 89

Backup to Diskette or Cassette 82

Bad Record Scan 88

Change Date & Time 55

Print Cutting Test Report 79

Print All Expanded Text 74

Print All Graphics 97

Print All Label Types 95

Print All Marquee Messages 76

Print All Special Messages 72

Print Expanded Text by Range 75

Print Flashkey Groups 70

Print Graphics by Range 98

Print Label Types by Range 96

Print Marquee Msg. by Range 77

Print Special Msg. by Range 73

Restore from Diskette or Cassette 81

Setup Flashkeys 30

Setup Marquee Message Modes 38

Setup Timed Marquee Msg. 39

Unmark Changed Items 86

Update Scales via MiniNet II 84

Update Changes via MiniNet II 85

View Network Comm. Report 37


A - 41 Appendix

Access Level 4 FunctionCode

Batch Price Changes 9

Unit Price 11


All Fields 10

Class(Change a Reporting Class in a PLU Record)

15

Collect Totals via MiniNet II 19

Create/Edit a Class Record 17

Delete Product/Class 12

Graphics 57

Itemized Labels 59

Label Types 58

Price Fields 16

Print All Hourly Totals 63

Print All Operator Totals 62

Print All Product List 66

Print All Product Totals 60

Print All Time Stamp Changes 90

Print All Totals Reports 65

Print Hourly Totals by Range of Hours 64

Print Product List by Range of PLU’s 67

Print Product Review - All 68

Print Product Review by Range of PLU’s 69

Print Product Totals by Range of PLU’s 61

Print Time Stamp Changes by Range 91

Scale ID & Store Information 49

Select Data to Transfer 87

Shelf Life 14

Tare 13

Time Stamp Changes(Set a Date & Time for changes)

18

View Product Totals 40

View Operator Totals 41

View Hourly Totals 42


Appendix A - 42


Clear All Hourly Totals 25

Clear All Operator Totals 26

Clear All Product Totals 24

Clear All Totals Records 21

Clear One Product’s Totals 22

Clear One Total’s Type for All PLU’s 23

Configure Totals Types 20

Print Configuration 78

Set Cassette/Disk Parameters 51

Set Network Parameters 52

Set What the Operator Can Modify 54

Void an Hour’s Totals 29

Void an Operator’s Totals 28

Void a Product’s Totals 27


Delete Time Stamp Changes 7

Label Information 48

Label Text Names 47

Operator Changes 43

Print Operator Changes 92

Print Operator ID List 71

Select Special Fields to Print on a Label 46

Setup Operator IDs 50

Setup Normal Scale Operation 56


G - 1 Glossary

Glossary


Glossary G - 2

Glossary

AAbstract Notation Syntax One(ASN.1)

A language used in OSI and TCP/IP networks to definedata types for use in network management.

Address An identifiable location. A location within memory. Alocation of a node within a network. A way of identifying anetwork, sub network, or node.

Address Mask A way of omitting certain parts of an IP Address in order toreach the target destination without broadcasting anaddress to unnecessary LAN segments or sub networks. It isalso referred to as a subnet mask. The address mask uses the32-bit IP Addressing scheme. A variation of 255.255.255.255is used.

Address Resolution The mapping of an IP Address to a hardware address. In theTCP/IP suite of protocols, Address Resolution Protocol(ARP) performs this function.

API Application Program Interface. Defined routines that arecallable services by a program.

Application Layer The topmost layer in the OSI reference model that aids inthe identification of communicating partners.

Auto Look-Up This feature automatically looks up the product after a setnumber of digits has been entered. This feature isconfigured in Scale Setup by your Supervisor.

BBackbone Used to refer to a set of nodes and links connected together

compromising a network. It is also used to refer to thephysical media that connects components to a network.

Barrier Determines the strength of how a film can pass oxygenthrough it.

Baseband A type of channel where data transmission is carried acrossonly one communication channel. Baseband supports onesignal transmission at a time. Ethernet is an example ofbaseband technology.

BER Bit Error Rate


G - 3 Glossary

Bit rate The rate, usually expressed in seconds, that bits aretransmitted.

Bridge A network device capable of connecting networks usingsimilar protocols.

Broadband A range of frequencies divided into narrow bands, each ofwhich can be used for different transmission purposes. Alsoknown as wideband.

Broadcast Simultaneous transmission of the same data to all nodesconnected to a network.

By Count An item which is priced by the number of items rather thanby weight (i.e., 3 for $1.00).

CCarrier Sense A signal generated at the physical network layer to inform

the data link layer that one or more nodes are transmittingon the underlying medium.

Carrier Sense Multiple Accesswith Collision Detection(CSMA/CD)

This is the media access control protocol. Nodes using thisprotocol listen to the medium to which they are attached. Aslong as there is no signal on the medium being monitored, anode listening can send data across the medium.

Cents Off The monetary amount to be subtracted from the unit price.

Class A way of grouping similar items.

Client A program that can be invoked by a user; a user being ahuman or a program.

Client/Server Architecture A general phrase used to refer to a distributed applicationenvironment where a program exists that can initiate asession and a program exists to answer requests of a client.

Client/Server Terms used to refer to a peer to peer method of operation ofapplications within hosts.

Collision An event that occurs when two or more nodes broadcast onthe same network medium at the same time.

Collision Detection The ability of a device to detect if a collision has occurred.

Conventional Rounding A rounding convention. When the number is greater than orequal to 5 you round up , when the number is less than 5you round down.

Crosstalk Signals that interfere with another signal being transmitted.


Glossary G - 4

DDaemon A common UNIX program that operates unattended,

performing standard services. This type of program can betriggered by time intervals for execution.

Datagram A basic unit of data that traverses a TCP/IP internet.

Data Link The part of a node that is controlled by a data link protocol.It is the logical connection between two nodes.

Data Link Protocol A prescribed way of handling the establishment,maintenance, and termination of a logical link between twonodes.

Destination Address In an Ethernet network, this refers to the target nodeaddress.

Discount Price (/lb.) The Frequent Shopper price per pound, which is lower thanthe unit price per pound.

Distributed Processing I/O processing, control functions, and actual processing isdispersed among two or more nodes.

Domain Name System A service used with TCP/IP to replace the previous methodof keeping track with host names, aliases, and internetaddresses. The domain name service is a distributeddatabase used to convert node names to internet addresses.

Dotted Decimal Notation A representation of addressing typically used in expressinginternet protocol addresses. For example, 137.1.1.100 is aninternet address identifying a network and host.

Double Byte Character Set A character set where alphanumeric characters arerepresented by two bytes. Examples of languages where thisis used include: Japanese, Chinese, and Korean.

EEAN13 Barcode The Ean13 Barcode is based on the 12 Digit UPC Code and is

widely used in international markets. EAN13 uses numericdata only.


G - 5 Glossary

Encapsulation A technique used by layered network protocols where, asdata travels down the network layers, headers and trailersare added to represent that layer. For example, when data ispassed from an application above the TCP layer, TCP adds aheader and a trailer encapsulating the data; likewise, thisdatagram is passed to the IP layer where IP wraps an IPheader and trailer around the TCP portion, and so on foreach layer. When this arrives at the target host, the reverseoccurs, as the data travels up the layers, respective headersand trailers are removed.

Ethernet A data link level protocol. It comprises layers one and twowhen compared to the OSI reference model. Ethernet is abroadcast technology and can be implemented withdifferent media types, such as thick or thin coaxial cable ortwisted pair cable. Ethernet uses CSMA/CD mechanism toaccess the medium.

Ethernet Address A 48 bit address, commonly referred to as a hard address.This address identifies an Ethernet network interface card(NIC), thus identifying a host hardware address.

FFixed Fluid Volume Item An item sold by a predetermined volume (i.e., Fresh-

squeezed orange juice from a Juice Bar is always 16 ounces).

Fixed Weight Item An item priced by a pre-determined weight (i.e., bread isalways 16 oz.).

Fixed Weight - By Count PLU An item normally sold by a specific weight, but in this case,sold by count (i.e., 2 - 16 oz. loaves of bread for $.79).

Flashkey A programmed preset key used to provide a descriptive on-screen look up of Product Numbers, Operator IDs, MacroNumbers, or Go To Groups.

Flashkey Home Group This is the first Flashkey Screen you will come to afterPressing [ENTER] on the Start a Run Screen. It can bedifferent for each scale in the department or store.

Fluid Ounce Item An item sold by the Fluid Ounce (i.e., Fresh-squeezedorange juice from a Juice Bar).

Fractional Pricing Enables you to price items by the 1/4 or 1/2 pound or by100 grams if operating in the metric mode. This pricingmode is determined by your Supervisor and configured by aHobart technician during scale setup. This mode is disabledif Pounds for Pricing is enabled.


Glossary G - 6

Frame Refers to the data and all headers and trailers.

Frame Check Sequence (FCS) A mathematical function used with bits in a frame. The FCSis appended to the frame and used by the receiving end torecalculate the value to determine if an error has occurred.

Frame Relay A switching mechanism for routing frames as quickly aspossible.

Function Codes Numbers which identify Supervisor functions and take youdirectly to the function by entering its two-digit code. Thesecodes are listed in the Appendix.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) A TCP/IP based application used for transferring files fromone system to another. Part of FTP provides passwordprotection.

GGateway A networking device that translates all protocols of one type

network into all protocols of another type network. (i.e.Ethernet to Token Ring).

Graphic (User) Provided the Label Type can accommodate a graphic, thereis a list of available graphics (listed by number) found in theAppendix.

HHardware Address A low-level address associated with each node on the

network. This address is generally the address related to theinterface card in the node. This may also be referred to asthe Ethernet Address.

IInternet Control Message Protocol(ICMP)

A protocol that works in conjunction with the InternetProtocol (IP) that handles error messages.

Interface A shared point between two entities, either software orhardware.

Internet Address A 32-bit address used to identify hosts and networks.


G - 7 Glossary

Internet Protocol (IP) The part of the TCP/IP protocol that handles routing ofdata.

IP Datagram The basic unit of information passed through a TCP/IPnetwork. This datagram contains source and destinationaddresses.

ISO International Standards Organization

ISO Reference Model The networking model created by ISO defining seven layersof a network, isolating functions within each layer. It is usedas a baseline for comparison with other network types.

JJitter A situation that can occur with a 10BaseT network where

signals are out of phase with each other.

Julian Date The numeric day of the year designates the date (i.e.,February 10 = 41). If configured, this date type may beprinted in a date field.

LLabel Stock Labels may be arranged into a roll in several ways: Die Cut,

Continuous Paper or Linerless Paper. Each type has its ownpurpose and use.

Label Type The Label Type determines the size, orientation and fields toprint on the label.

Local Area Network (LAN) A collection of computer related equipment connected insuch a way that communication can occur between all nodesconnected to the medium.

Learning Bridge Serves as a bridge but has the capability to learn what nodesare connected and route data accordingly.

Leased Line A dedicated communication line between two points.

Link Used to refer to a connection between two end points.

Logical Link Control The upper part of the data link sublayer protocolresponsible for governing the exchange of data between twoendpoints.


Glossary G - 8

MMacro A series of keystrokes that can be recalled by entering a

reference number (Macro Number).

Management Information Base(MIB)

A database containing configuration and statisticalinformation about nodes on a network.

Maximum Transmission Unit(MTU)

The largest datagram that can transverse a given networksuch as Ethernet or Token Ring.

Media Access Control (MAC) The lower half of the data link sublayer. It is responsible forframing data and controlling the physical link between twostations.

Medium Access Unit (MAU) A device for central connection of nodes operating in anetwork.

NName Resolution The process of mapping aliases to an address. The domain

name system provides a mechanism to perform thisfunction.

Network Administrator The person designated to maintain the network. This personshould have working knowledge of network wiring,requirements, etc. See System Administrator.

Network Basic Input OutputOperating System (NETBIOS)

An IBM and compatible network programming interface.

Network A collection of computers and related devices connected sothat communication can occur.

Network Address In TCP/IP networks, this refers to the IP Address of a node.

Network File System (NFS) Sun MicroSystems protocols that permit clients to mountremote directories onto their own local file system, thusappearing to be local.

Network Interface Card (NIC) A generic reference to a networking interface card.

Node Refers to different types of networking devices.


G - 9 Glossary

OOn Screen Library A list of products organized by Class; with the PLU number

as the primary key. Press [HELP] to access the librarywhenever you are on a “Product/Class Number” field.

Open Systems Interconnection(OSI)

A set of ISO standards relating to data communications.

Operator ID Identification number assigned to scale operators so thatyour Supervisor can track various totals information byoperator.

PPacket In TCP/IP networks, this refers to the data passing between

the internet layer and the data link layer. A packet includesthe IP header, TCP header, and data.

Pathname The complete string of information that must be entered intoa system in order to access or identify a file.

Packet InterNet Groper (PING) A program used with TCP/IP networks. The PING programprovides a way of testing access to a destination by sendingan ICMP echo request, then waiting for a response from thetarget host.

Percent Added The percent that is added to the total price in the instance ofadditional service.

Percent Off The percentage of the total price which is subtracted fromthe total price.

Point to Point Protocol (PPP) A protocol that has the ability to provide host to networkand router to router connections over synchronous andasynchronous lines.

Port In TCP/IP, a number used to identify applications. Ingeneral, a port is referred to as an entry or exit point. Portsare associated with TCP or UDP transport protocols.

Pounds for Pricing Allows you to price items x Lbs. for $ _____ (x can be 2-9).This pricing mode is determined by your Supervisor andconfigured by a Hobart technician during scale setup. Thismode is disabled if Fractional Pricing is enabled.

PrePack To package items before offering them for sale to theconsumer (i.e., meats, cheeses, etc.).


Glossary G - 10

Primary Printer The printer that is built-in to the scale system.

Printhead The surface of the printer that comes in contact with thelabel stock.

Product Life The number of days before a perishable product should beconsumed or frozen (i.e., Use By, Freeze By or Best Before).

Proportional Tare Thje percentage of the total product weight that is the“wrapper” for the individual pieces.

Protocol A set of rules governing the method of operation.

Protocol Conversion Changing one type of protocol to another type of protocol.

RRandom Weight An item that need to be weighed before it can be priced.

Random Weight - By Count PLU An item which is priced by the number of items per packagerather than by weight (i.e., 3 for $1.00).

Repeater A network device that repeats signals so the length of anetwork can be extended.

Reset Button Use this button to reset the scale to the Start a Run Screen inthe unlikely event the scale stops responding to keyboardinput.

Rezero Defines zero weight on weigher as the current weight on theplatter. Used to add/remove platter tare or after Power-upwhen weight was accidentally left on the platter.

Round Down (Truncate) A rounding convention. Regardless of the number, youalways round down (i.e. 8.659 rounds to 8.65).

Round Up A rounding convention. Any number greater than zero (0),you always round up (i.e. 8.659 rounds to 8.66; 8.650 roundsto 8.65).

Routing The process of determining which path is to be used for datatransmission.

Routing Table A list of valid paths through which data can be transmitted.

RS-232-C A physical layer specification for connecting devices.


G - 11 Glossary

SSave/Recall The Save/Recall Key is used to begin or end a macro

function (creating, executing or deleting macros).

Secondary Printer A printer attached to the scale system by means of a cable.It is typically used to print secondary labels or NutriFacts.

Segment A protocol data unit that consists of TCP header informationand optional data. Parts of a network; typically EthernetLANs are divided into parts, generally referred to assegments.

Sell By Date This number is the date that the store must sell the item. Itis calculated by taking today’s date and adding it to theShelf Life (from the item record).

Server An application that answers requests from clients.

Shelf Life The number of days that a perishable product may stay onthe shelf.

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol(SMTP)

In TCP/IP, an application including a client and a serverproviding E-Mail services for all hosts with TCP/IPsoftware installed and enabled.

Serial Line Internet Protocol(SLIP)

A protocol used to utilize Internet protocol over serial lines,such as a switched telephone line.

Socket In TCP/IP, a socket is an addressable point that consists ofthe IP Address and the TCP or UDP port number. Itprovides access to TCP/IP protocols.

Socket Address The complete designation of a TCP/IP node. It consists of a32-bit IP Address and a 16 bit port number.

SubClass The second-tier of the class structure (i.e., Class = Meat,SubClass = Chicken).

Subnet The part of a TCP/IP network identified by a portion of theinternet address.

Subnet Address The part of the IP Address that identifies the subnetwork.

Subnet Mask A way of isolating broadcasts to the desired network(s).

System Administrator The person responsible for maintaining the ScaleMastersystem. See Network Administrator.


Glossary G - 12

TTare (Fixed Tare) The weight of the packing material for which the customer

does not pay.

Total Tare This tare is calculated by adding Fixed Tare andProportional Tare.(Fixed Tare + Proportional Tare = Total Tare)

TCP Transmission Control Protocol. A transport layer protocolthat is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. TCP provides areliable stream mechanism performing re-transmissionwhen a positive acknowledgment is not returned to thesource from the destination node.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. TCP/IPis an upper layer networking protocol. It is client/serverbased at the application layer.

Telnet A TCP/IP application using TCP as a transport mechanism.It consists of a client and a server. All TCP/IP protocolsuites have this application because it is part of thedefinition of TCP/IP.

Throughput The amount of data that can be successfully moved across amedium or processed within a certain time period.

Token Ring A lower layer networking protocol using a token passingmethod controlling data traffic. It is connection oriented at adata link level.

Topology The configuration of network devices. Examples include:BUS, Star, Ring, Dual Ring, etc.

Totals Type A means of categorizing totals information by specific types.As an example, there can be a Totals Type for items thathave been repackaged or rewrapped (for whatever reason).

Traffic A generic term used to describe the amount of data on anetwork backbone at a given period in time.

Transceiver A network device required in baseband networks. It takes adigital signal and puts it on the analog baseband medium.Transceivers are devices that also sense collisions.


G - 13 Glossary

U

Unit Price (/lb.) The price per unit of measure

UPC Numbering System The UPC Number System identifies the type of Bar Codeused by the item. Random Weight items use numbersystems 02 or 04. Fluid ounces and fixed weight items useUPC number system 00, 04, 06, 07.

Number System UPC Bar Code

02 2XXXXXB$$$$C

04 4XXXXXB$$$$C

00 0VVVVVPPPPPC

04 4VVVVVPPPPPC

06 6VVVVVPPPPPC

07 7VVVVVPPPPPC

XXXXX = UPC Number (Product Identifying)$$$$ = Price (99.99)B = 2nd Check Digit (Price Check Sum Digit; used for error detection)C = Check Digit (Check Sum Digit; used for error detection)VVVVV = Vendor Number or Manufacturer NumberPPPPP = Product Number

User Data Protocol (UDP) A transport layer protocol in the TCP/IP protocol suite.Unlike TCP it does not provide re-transmission.

VVirtual Appearing to exist, but in reality the appearance is achieved

by functions or processes.

WWell Known Port In TCP/IP, an address for an expressed purpose generally

agreed upon by TCP/IP users.

Weigh Type The way to select the mode that the scale will operate in (i.e.,Auto Weigh, Manual Weigh, etc.).

Wide Area Network (WAN) A network spanning large geographic distances.


Glossary G - 14

123

10Base2 A reference to the cabling used in an Ethernet network. Itliterally means 10Megabits per second, using basebandsignaling, with a continuous cable segment length of 100meters and a maximum of 2 segments.

10Base5 A reference to the cabling used in an Ethernet network. Itliterally means 10Megabits per second, using basebandsignaling, with 5 continuous segments, not exceeding 100meters per segment.

10BaseT A reference to the cabling used in an Ethernet network.Meaning 10Megabits per second, using baseband signaling,and twisted pair cabling.


I - 1 Index

Index


Index I - 2

—A—Access Levels, Operator, A-40Access Point, 14-5Accumulate Items, 7-86Adapter Board, PC, 14-6Add a New Product (Add a New PLU), 3-14Add Changes from Diskette, 6-5, 6-19Address, IP, 13-2

See Also IP AddressAdvertised Price, 11-2, 11-3

Activating, 11-6Advertised Sale Pricing, 11-3, 11-4Reactivating Regular Price, 11-8Retail Comparison, 11-3, 11-5Value Packing, 11-3, 11-4

Advertised Sale Pricing, 11-3, 11-4All Totals

Print, 5-5, 5-11Clear, 4-17, 4-27

Antenna, 14-6Directional, 14-6Omni-directional, 14-6

Assignment Form, IntraNet Scale IP Address, 13-4Auto Look-Up, 7-98Auto Look-Up, Self Service, 9-8

—B—Backup Changes to Diskette, 6-5, 6-11Backup or Restore with Intranet, 6-23

Send Changes via Intranet, 6-25Send to Scales via Intranet, 6-23

Backup/Restore, 1-4, 6-3Backup/Restore Flowchart, 6-2Backup/Restore Function Codes, A-38Backup to Diskette, 6-5, 6-6Bad Record Scan, 6-3, 6-5, 6-18, 6-22Batch Price Changes, Making, 3-81Bonus Points, 11-2, 11-16

Random Weight & Fixed Weight PLU’s, 11-16Random Weight-By Count PLU’s, 11-16Setting Up, 11-17

By Count PLU, 3-18, 3-78, 4-10, 4-13, 4-15

—C—Cassette/Disk, 7-103Cassette Player/Recorder, 2-3, 6-6Change Product, 1-4, 3-66, 3-76, 3-81

Accessing, 3-5, 3-66Add a New Product (Add a New PLU) 3-14All Fields, 3-81

See also Add a New Product

—C—(Change Product Continued...)

All Price Fields, 3-76By Count PLU’s, 3-78Fixed Weight PLU’s, 3-79Fluid Ounce PLU’s, 3-80Random Weight PLU’s, 3-77

Batch Price Changes, 3-81By Class, 3-82By PLU Range, 3-84

Change Another Field, 3-7, 3-9Change Pricing Mode, 3-7

Pounds for Pricing, 3-7Fractional Pricing, 3-7

Changing All Fields, 3-81Changing a Product’s Reporting Class, 3-74Changing Shelf Life/Product Life, 3-73Changing Tare, 3-69Changing Unit Price, 3-68Common“ F” Keys, 3-7Creating a Class, 3-10Delete This Product, 3-7, 3-8Editing a Class, 3-13Fixed Weight PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-18Fluid Ounce PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-18Function Codes, A-37Making Changes to Product Information, 3-65Menu Screen (Accessing), 3-66Random Weight PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17Security Label, 3-7

ChangesImmediate, 3-6, 3-8, 3-66Time Stamp, 3-3, 3-62, 3-66, 3-68, 3-69

Print, 5-23Changing Flashkey Height/Width, 7-8Class, 3-3, 3-4, 3-10, 3-13, 3-82, A-33

Creating New, 3-10Editing, 3-13Reporting, 3-11, 3-12, 3-74, 3-75Structure, Recommended, 3-4, 3-10, A-33

Clear All Hourly Totals, 4-17, 4-25Clear All Operator Totals, 4-17, 4-24Clear All Product Totals, 4-17, 4-19Clear All Totals, 4-17, 4-27Clear One Product’s Totals, 4-17, 4-20Clear One Totals Type for All Products, 4-17, 4-22Clear Totals, 4-17Clear Totals Menu, 4-3Client Scale, 13-3, A-2, A-5

See also IntraNetCollect Totals via MiniNet II, 4-3, 4-40Communication Connections, 2-3Communications, 7-102

Cassette/Disk, 7-103Network, 7-105

Configuration, 6-3Configuration Report, Print, 5-3, 5-43


I - 3 Index

—C—(Continued...)

Configure Totals Types, 4-3, 4-34Configuring Frequent Shopper, 11-12Configuring Network Card, 14-7

Spectrum 24, 14-7Spectrum 802.11, 14-7Telxon/Aironet 2.4, 14-9Telxon/Aironet 802.11, 14-7Telxon/Aironet 900, 14-11

Configuring Self Service, 9-3See also Self Service Configuring

Configuring Wireless TCP/IP Networks, 14-7Connections

Communications, 2-3Electrical, 2-2

Consumer Default Merchandising Screen, Self Service, 9-12Continuous Paper Labels, 7-31Control Panel Overview, 2-4Copy and Edit

Expanded Text, 3-33Marquee Messages, 3-54NutriFacts, 3-44Special Messages, 3-24

Copy Text, A-25Creating Macros, A-28Create New

Expanded Text, 3-31Marquee Messages, 3-52NutriFacts, 3-43Special Messages, 3-22

Creating Flashkeys, 7-10Creating Operator ID’s, 7-3Creating Permanent or Daily Messages, 7-110Creating a Product Group Flashkey, 7-15Custom Labels, 7-83Customer Loyalty Programs, 11-10Cut Text, A-23Cutting Test Report, Printing 5-13

—D—Daily Message

Creating, 7-110Data Type

Flashkeys/Macros, 6-3Label Data, 6-3Operator Data, 6-3PLU Data, 6-3Scale Configuration, 6-3Store Name/Number, 6-3

DateJulian, 7-33Sell By, 7-33

Date/Time, 7-94Date/Time, Self Service, 9-4Department IP Addresses

IntraNet, 13-16ScaleMaster, 13-8

—D—(Continued...)

DeleteExpanded Text, 3-40Marquee Messages, 3-60NutriFacts, 3-48Product, 3-8Special Messages, 3-29

Deleting a Macro, A-30Delete Flashkey, 7-18Delete Flashkey Group, 7-20Delete Time Stamp Changes, 8-3Description, 3-11, 3-15, 3-16Direct Sequence, 14-2, 14-4Directional Antenna, 14-6Disk Drive, Floppy, 2-3Disk Player/Recorder, 2-3, 6-6, 6-15, 6-19Die Cut Labels, 7-31

—E—EAN13 Barcode, 12-2

Changing an Existing PLU, 12-9Entering a New Product, 12-5Examples, A-17Itemized Labels, 12-11Setting Default Prefix for PLUs, 12-3Setting Up, 12-3Understanding…, A-16

EditExpanded Text, 3-37Marquee Messages, 3-58NutriFacts, 3-47Special Messages, 3-27

Edit Home Flashkey Group, 7-17Editor

Marquee, A-27Text, A-20

Electrical Connections, 2-2Ethernet Card, 13-2, A-12Ethernet Networks, A-6

Hubs, A-6Crossover Function, A-7

Patch Cord Wiring, A-7Straight Trough Patch Cord, A-8Crossover Patch Cord, A-9

Wiring, A-6Wiring Identification, A-10Wiring Illustration, 13-6

Executing a Macro, A-29Expanded Text, 3-3, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-31

Copy and Edit, 3-33Create New, 3-31Delete, 3-40Edit, 3-37Print, 5-32Use, 3-36

External Disk Drive, 6-6


Index I - 4

—F—FCC Note, 1-2FCC Rules, 1-2Fields, Reviewing Available, 7-36Fixed Weight PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-18, 3-71, 3-79Flashkeys, 2-2, 2-4, 6-3, 7-6

Changing Height/Width, 7-8Clear Group, 7-22Copy Group, 7-27Creating, 7-10Deleting, 7-18, 7-20Edit Home Flashkey Group, 7-17Group/Product, 7-15, 7-19Insert Group, 7-23Move Group, 7-25Positioning, 7-8Printing, 5-25Print Reports, 5-3View Group, 7-16

FlowchartBackup/Restore, 6-2Change Product, 3-2Miscellaneous Menu, 8-2Print Reports, 5-2Scale Setup, 7-2Totals, 4-2

Fluid Ounce PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-18, 3-80Forced Price, 3-86Forced Tare, 3-72Frequencies, Understanding, 14-2

Direct Sequence, 14-2, 14-4Frequency Hopping, 14-2, 14-3

Frequency Hopping, 14-2, 14-3Frequency Protocols, 14-4Frequent Shopper, 11-2, 11-10

Activating, 11-13Configuration Questions, 11-11Configuring, 11-12Reactivating Regular Price, 11-15

Function Codes, Quantum, A-37

—G—Gateway IP Address, 13-9

Examples, 13-11Setting Up, 13-10

General Information, 1-4, 2-2Glossary of Common Terms, G-2Graphics, 7-84

Print, 5-40

—H—HELP Key Functions, 2-10

About the Keyboard, 2-11Basic Help, 2-10, 2-12Help on “F” Keys, 2-11Moving Through the System, 2-10, 2-13

HELP, Product Number Lookup, 2-5, 2-10Home Flashkey Group, 7-17

See also FlashkeysHourly Totals, 4-7, 5-5

Clear, 4-17, 4-25Collect, 7-36View, 4-14Void, 4-32Print, 5-9

Hobart Recommended Class Structure, A-33Hub, A-12

—I—Immediate Changes, 3-6, 3-8, 3-66Information Tracker, 8-5

Network Report, 8-6Operator Changes, 8-8

Insert Flashkey Group, 7-23Item Tickets, Selecting, 7-88Itemized Receipts, Selecting, 7-90IntraNet, 6-4, 8-3, 8-5, 8-6, 13-5, A-3

Assignment Form, 13-4Example, 13-19Send Changes via…, 6-25Send to Scales via…, 6-23Setting Up, 13-13

Department IP Addresses, 13-16Saving IP Changes, 13-18Scale IP Address, 13-14Server Scale IP Address, 13-14Subnet Mask, 13-15Well Known Port Number, 13-15

IntraNet/ScaleMaster, 13-20, A-5Reading Data From Scales, A-5Sending Data to Scales, A-5Setting Up, 13-20

IP Addresses, 13-2Assignment Form, 13-4Setting Up on Existing Network, 13-3Setting Up on Isolated Network, 13-3See also IntraNetSee also ScaleMasterTroubleshooting, A-11

Itemized Labels, 7-86Itemized Labels, Setting Up EAN13 Barcode, 12-11

—J—Julian Packed-on, 7-33Julian Product Life, 7-33Julian Sell By, 7-33


I - 5 Index

—K—Keyboard, 2-3, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11

Cherry, 2-9IBM PC, 2-3Key Tronic, 2-9Maxi Switch, 2-9Self Service, 9-3

Keypad, Produce, 9-16Keypad, Self Service, 9-3

—L—Label Data, 6-3Label Information, 7-37Label Related Item, Print, 5-28

Print Expanded Text Menu, 5-32Print Marquee Messages Menu, 5-35Print Reports, 5-3, 5-28Print Reusable Text Menu, 5-29Print Special Messages Menu, 5-29

Label, Select Special to Print, 7-33Label Stock Styles, 2-8, 7-31

Continuous, 7-31Die Cut, 7-31Linerless, 7-31

Label Text Names, 7-34Label Types, 7-40, 7-41Label Types, Changing the Default, 7-37Label Types, Self Service Default, 9-5Labels, 7-30

By Family, Standard, 7-43 to 7-63By Size, Standard, 7-64 to 7-80Custom, 7-83Itemized, 7-86Menu, Using the, 7-32Narrow, 7-81

Label Graphics, 7-84L.E.D., 13-25Link Quality, 14-13

—M—Macros, 6-3, A-28

Creating, A-28Deleting, A-30Executing, A-29Recording, A-28

Manual, How to Use, 1-4, 1-5Mark Text, A-22Marquee Editor, 3-20, 3-50, 3-52, 3-56, 3-59, A-27

Blink On/Blink Off, 3-50, A-27Clear, 3-50, A-27Frame, 3-50, A-27Hold, 3-50, A-27Roll, 3-50, A-27Scroll, 3-50, A-27Scroll/Frame Speed, 3-50, A-27Start/Stop Marquee Test, 3-50, A-27

—M—(Continued...)

Marquee Messages, 3-3, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-46, 3-50, A-27Copy and Edit, 3-54Create New, 3-52Daily, 7-108, 7-110Delete, 3-60Edit, 3-58Permanent, 7-108, 7-110Print, 5-35Timed, 7-108, 7-113Use, 3-56

Marquee Modes, 7-108Marquee Setup, 7-107Memory, 2-2Merchandising Programs, 11-2

Setting Up Your Scale, 11-2Minimum Price Per Pound, Programming Security Label, 10-6MiniNet II, 6-3, 6-4, 6-23, A-6

Collect Totals via, 4-3, 4-41Miscellaneous Function Codes, A-39Miscellaneous Menu

Overview, 8-3Print, 5-45

Miscellaneous Reports, Print, 5-3MODNET, 2-3Move a Flashkey Group, 7-25

—N—Narrow Labels, 7-81Network Card, PC, 14-6

Configuring, 14-7See also Configuring Network Card

Network Configurations, A-2IntraNet, A-3

See also IntraNetMiniNet II, A-6ScaleMaster, A-3

See also ScaleMasterScaleMaster/IntraNet, A-5

Reading Data from the Scales, A-5Sending Data to the Scales, A-5

Understanding..., A-2Networks, Ethernet

See Ethernet NetworksNetwork IP Address, 13-10

Setting Up, 13-10Examples, 13-11

Network Report, 8-6NutriFacts Data, 3-19, 3-42

Copy and Edit, 3-44Create New, 3-43Delete, 3-48Edit, 3-47


Index I - 6

—O—Omni-directional Antenna, 14-6On Screen Library, 2-2, 2-5, 2-10Operator Access Levels, A-40Operate Mode, Return to, 8-9Operator Changes, 5-45, 8-5, 8-8

Print, 5-45Operator Data, 6-3

Creating, 7-3List, 5-3Print, 5-26

Operator Log-on Required, 7-5Operator/Security ID’s, Self Service, 9-6Operator Totals, 4-7

Clear, 4-17, 4-24Print, 5-8View, 4-11Void, 4-31

OverviewBackup/Restore, 6-3Change Product, 3-3Configuring an EAN13 Barcode, 12-2Control Panel, 2-4Interfacing the SLA or SLD with the Quantum, 10-2Miscellaneous Menu, 8-3Print Reports, 5-3Scale Setup, 7-3Self Service, 9-2Supervisor Manual, 1-3Supervisor Mode, 2-14Support File, 3-19Totals Menu, 4-3Understanding Hardwired TCP/IP Scale Communication, 13-2Working with Merchandising Programs, 11-2

—P—Packed-on Date, 7-33Parallel Port, 2-3Paste Text, A-24Percent Added, 11-2, 11-21

Activating, 11-21Reactivating Regular Price, 11-23

Percentage Tare, A-30Permanent Message, Creating, 7-110PING Test, 13-22Platter Tare, 3-72Player/Recorder

Cassette, 2-3, 6-6Disk, 2-3, 6-5, 6-6, 6-11, 6-15, 6-19

PLU, EAN13 Barcode, 12-2, 12-3Default Prefix, 12-3Existing PLU, 12-9New PLU, 12-5, 12-9

PLU, Programming a Security Label, 10-2

—P—(Continued...)

PLU, TextDescription, 3-11, 3-15, 3-16Expanded Text

See also Expanded TextMarquee Messages

See also Marquee MessagesNutriFacts

See also NutrifactsSpecial Messages

See also Special MessagesPLU Data, 6-3Portion Pricing, 11-2, 11-17

Activating, 11-18Setting Up, 11-20

Positioning the Flashkey, 7-8Power Cord, 2-2Power Key, 2-3, 2-4Price Changes, 3-68Pricing Mode, Change, 3-7Print

All Operator Totals, 5-8All Totals Reports, 5-11Configuration Report, 5-3, 5-43Cutting Test Report, 5-13Expanded Text Menu, 5-32Flashkeys, 5-3, 5-25Graphics, 5-40Hourly Totals, 5-9Label Related Items Menu, 5-3, 5-28Label Types, 5-38Marquee Messages Menu, 5-35Miscellaneous Menu, 5-45Operator Changes, 5-3, 5-45Operator ID List, 5-3, 5-26Product List Menu, 5-3, 5-19Product Review Menu, 5-3, 5-21Product Totals Menu, 5-6Products Menu, 5-18Reusable Text Menu, 5-29Special Messages Menu, 5-29Time Stamp Changes, 5-23Totals Menu, 5-3, 5-5

PrinterPrimary, 3-18Secondary, 2-3, 3-18

Print Reports, 5-3Configuration, 5-3, 5-43Cutting Test, 5-13Expanded Text Menu, 5-32Flashkeys, 5-3, 5-25Marquee Messages Menu, 5-35Miscellaneous Menu, 5-3, 5-45Operator Changes, 5-46


I - 7 Index

—P—(Print Reports Continued...)

Operator ID List, 5-3, 5-26Label Related Items Menu, 5-3, 5-28

Reusable Text Menu, 5-29Label Types, 5-38Graphics, 5-40

Reusable Text Menu, 5-29Special Messages Menu, 5-29Product Information, 5-3Time Stamp Changes, 5-23Totals, 5-3, 5-11

Print Reports Menu, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5Accessing, 5-4

Produce Keypad, 9-2, 9-16See also Self Service Produce Keypad, Using

Product LifeChanging, 3-73Date, 7-33

Product List Menu, Print, 5-19Product Review Menu, Print, 5-21Products Menu, Print, 5-18Product Totals, 4-7, 5-5

Clear, 4-17, 4-19Print, 5-6View, 4-8Void, 4-29

Product Totals Menu, Print, 5-6Programming Minimum Price Per Pound, Security Label, 10-6Programming a Security Label for a PLU, 10-2

New PLU, 10-3Existing PLU, 10-5

Programming Total Price Per Pound, Security Label, 10-6Proportional Tare (Percentage Tare), 3-18, 3-70, A-30

How the Percentage Tare Value is Calculated, A-31Percentage Tare Procedure, A-31

—Q—Quantum Function Codes, A-37

—R—Random Weight PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-77Reporting Class, 3-11, 3-12, 3-74Reading Data From the Scales, A-5Recording a Macro, A-28Reset Button, 2-3Restore

Add Changes from Diskette, 6-5, 6-19Restore from Diskette, 6-5, 6-15

Retail Comparison, 11-3, 11-5Return to Operate Mode, 8-9

—R—(Continued...)

Reusable Text Menu, Print, 5-29Expanded Text Menu, 5-32Marquee Messages Menu, 5-35Special Messages Menu, 5-29

Recording Available Fields, 7-36Rezero, 2-5

—S—Save/Recall, A-28Save/Recall Key, A-28Saving IP Changes


Scale Communication, TestingSee TCP/IP Connection, Testing

Scale ID & Store Information, 7-100Scale IP Address


ScaleMaster, 6-3, 13-5, A-3Example, 13-9Gateway IP Address, 13-10, 13-11Network IP Address, 13-10, 13-11Setting Up, 13-7

Department IP Address, 13-8Saving IP Changes, 13-8Scale IP Address, 13-7Server Scale IP Address, 13-8Subnet Mask, 13-8Well Known Port Number, 13-8

Setting Up On Different NetworkSee Gateway IP Address

ScaleMaster/IntraNet, A-5, 13-20Example, 13-20Reading Data from the Scales, A-5Sending Data to the Scales, A-5Setting Up, 13-20

Scale Operation, 7-91Date/Time, 7-94Scale ID & Store Information, 7-100Set What the Operator Can Modify, 7-92Setup Normal Scale Operation, 7-95

Scale Setup, 1-4, 7-3Creating Operator ID's, 7-3Communications, 7-102Flashkeys, 7-6Function Codes, A-37Labels Menu, 7-32Marquee Setup, 7-107Scale Operation, 7-91

Scale Setup Menu, 7-3Screen Highlights, 2-6, 2-7Security/Operator ID’s, 9-6


Index I - 8

—S—(Continued...)

Security Label, 10-2Programming a PLU, 10-2

New PLU, 10-3Existing PLU, 10-5

Programming Minimum Price Per Pound, 10-6Programming Total Price, 10-6Programming Total Price and Minimum Price Per Pound, 10-6

Security Label Applier, (SLA), 10-2See also Security Label

Select Font, A-21Select Special Field to Print on Label, 7-33Selecting Item Tickets, 7-88Selecting Itemized Receipts, 7-90Selecting Label Types, 7-41Self Service, 9-2

Keyboard, 9-3Keypad, 9-3Produce Keypad, 9-2, 9-16Scale, 9-2

Self Service, Configuring, 9-3Auto Look-Up, 9-8Consumer Default Merchandising Screen, 9-12Date & Time, 9-4Default Label Types, 9-5Security/Operator ID’s, 9-6

Self Service, Setting Up, 9-10Self Service, Zeroing the Scale, 9-15Self Service Produce Keypad, Using, 9-16

Setting Up Speedkeys, 9-16Deleting Speedkeys, 9-19

Secondary Printer, 2-3Security Label, 3-7Sell By Date, 7-33Send Changes via Intranet, 6-5, 6-25Send to Scales via Intranet, 6-5, 6-23Sending Data to Scales, A-5Server Scale, 13-13, A-2, A-5

See also IntraNetServer Scale IP Address


Set What the Operator Can Modify, 7-92Setting Up the Scale for Merchandising Programs, 11-2Setting Up Wireless Communication, 14-5Setup Normal Scale Operation, 7-95Shelf Life, Changing, 3-73Signal Strength Meter Test, 14-13Special Messages, 3-3, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22

Copy and Edit, 3-24Create New, 3-22Delete, 3-29Edit, 3-27Print, 5-29Use, 3-26

—S—(Continued...)

Speedkeys, Self Service Produce Keypad, 9-16Setting Up, 9-16Deleting, 9-19

Spread Spectrum Technology, 14-2Standard Labels by Family, 7-43Standard Labels by Size, 7-64Store Information, Scale ID, 7-100Store Name, 6-3Store Name/Number, 6-3Store Number, 6-3SubClass, 3-12Subnet Mask


Supervisor Menu, Accessing, 2-5, 2-14Supervisor Mode, Overview, 2-14Supervisor Manual Overview, 1-3Support File, 3-19

—T—Tare

Forced, 3-72Percentage, A-30Platter, 3-72Proportional, A-30

Tare, Changing, 3-69TCP/IP, 13-2

IntraNet Configuration, 13-13See also IntraNet

ScaleMaster Configuration, 13-7See also ScaleMaster

Setting Up, 13-5Wireless, 14-2

TCP/IP, Connection, Testing, 13-22L.E.D., 13-25PING Test, 13-22

Temperature Range, 2-2Text Block, 3-51Text Editor, A-20

Copy Text, A-25Cut Text, A-23Mark Text, A-22Paste Text, A-24Select Font, A-21

Timed Marquee Messages, 7-113Time/Date, 7-94Time/Date, Self Service, 9-4Time Stamp Changes, 3-3, 3-62, 3-66, 3-68, 3-69

Delete, 8-3Print, 5-23


I - 9 Index

—T—(Continued...)

Totals, 4-4Clear, 4-3, 4-17Clear All, 4-17, 4-27Clear All Hourly, 4-17, 4-25Clear All Operator, 4-17, 4-24Clear All Product, 4-17, 4-19Clear One Product’s, 4-17, 4-20Clear One Type for All Products, 4-17, 4-22Collect via MiniNet II, 4-3, 4-40Cutting Test Report, 5-13Hourly (Clear), 4-17, 4-25Hourly (Print), 5-9Hourly (View), 4-7, 4-14Hourly (Void), 4-32Operator (Clear), 4-17, 4-24Operator (Print), 5-8Operator (View), 4-7, 4-11Operator (Void), 4-31Print, 5-3, 5-11Print All Totals Reports, 5-11Product (Clear), 4-17, 4-19Product (Print), 5-6Product (Void), 4-29Product (View), 4-7, 4-8View, 4-3, 4-7Void, 4-3, 4-28

Totals Function Codes, A-37Totals Menu, 1-4, 4-3

Accessing, 4-5Total Price, Programming Security Label, 10-6Totals Record

Items, 4-4Packages, 4-4Price, 4-4Runs, 4-4Weight, 4-4

Totals TypeClear One for All Product, 4-22Configure, 4-3, 4-34Create, 4-35Delete, 4-39Edit, 4-37

Troubleshooting, A-11Ethernet Card A-12IP Address, A-11Hub to Hub, A-14Hub to Scale, A-12

—U—Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration, A-16Understanding Ethernet Networks, A-6Understanding Frequencies, 14-2Understanding Network Configuration, A-2Understanding Text Editor, A-20Understanding Wireless TCP/IP Scale Communication, 14-2Unit Price, 3-68Unmark Changed Items, 6-3, 6-5, 6-9, 6-10, 6-14, 6-25Use

Expanded Text, 3-36Marquee Messages, 3-56Special Messages, 3-26

Using the Keyboard and Self Service Keypad, 9-3

—V—Value Packing, 11-3, 11-4View

Flashkey Group, 7-16Hourly Totals, 4-7, 4-14Operator Totals, 4-7, 4-11Product Totals, 4-7, 4-8Totals, 4-3, 4-7

VoidHourly Totals, 4-32Operator Totals, 4-31Product Totals, 4-29Totals, 4-3, 4-28

—W—Weigh Station, 9-2Well Known Port Number


Wireless TCP/IP, 14-2Configuring, 14-7Setting Up, 14-5Understanding, 14-2

Wiring Illustration, Ethernet, 13-6Word Wrap, 7-39Working with Labels, 7-30

—Z—Zeroing Scale, Self Service, 9-15

F-34350 LITHO IN U.S.A.

701 S. RIDGE AVENUETROY, OHIO 45374-0001

Documents

Hobart Quantum Manual